construction documents · 2019. 12. 21. · march 22, 2018 100% construction documents 22 01 00...

PROJECT MANUAL DIVISIONS 21 THRU 28

VOLUME 2

UNLV SEP BUILDING MECHANICAL IMPROVEMENTS

UNLV PROJECT No. 1702/ PC-6219

SATELLITE ENERGY PLANT BUILD-OUT

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

MARCH 22, 2018

SCS PROJECT No. 1712

UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements TABLE OF CONTENTS March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 00 01 10 Page 1

00 01 10

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 ............................................................................................................................ Summary of Work 01 29 13 ................................................................................................................ Request for Interpretation 01 29 73 .......................................................................................................................... Schedule of Values 01 31 13 ......................................................................................................................... Project Coordination 01 31 19 .............................................................................................................................. Project Meetings 01 31 32 .............................................................................................................. For Information Documents 01 32 16 ......................................................................................................... Construction Project Schedule 01 32 33 ........................................................................................................... Photographic Documentation 01 33 00 ....................................................................................................................... Submittal Procedures 01 33 23 .................................................................................... Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 01 35 16 .......................................................................................................... Alteration Project Procedures 01 35 26 ......................................................................................... Safety and Environmental Requirements 01 40 00 ................................................................................................................................. Quality Control 01 42 19 ....................................................................................................................... Reference Standards 01 43 26 ........................................................................................................ Testing and Inspecting Agency 01 66 00 ..................................................................................Product Storage and Handling Requirements 01 73 29 ......................................................................................................................... Cutting and Patching 01 74 13 ............................................................................................................................ Progress Cleaning 01 74 19 .................................................................................................... Construction Waste Management 01 74 23 .................................................................................................................................. Final Cleaning 01 75 00 ...................................................................................................................... Starting and Adjusting 01 75 10 ............................................................................................................. Demonstration and Training 01 77 00 ........................................................................................................................ Closeout Procedures 01 78 23 .................................................................................................... Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 36 ........................................................................................................................................ Warranties 01 78 39 .............................................................................................................. Project Record Documents 01 78 43 ...................................................................................................... Spare Parts and Extra Materials DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 00 ..........................................................................................................................Selective Demolition DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 03 11 00 ............................................................................................................................. Concrete Forming 03 20 00 ........................................................................................................................ Concrete Reinforcing 03 30 00 ..................................................................................................................... Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 35 00 ............................................................................................................................ Concrete Finishing 03 39 00 ................................................................................................................................ Concrete Curing DIVISION 4 – MASONRY 04 05 16 ...................................................................................................... Masonry Mortaring and Grouting 04 22 00 ..................................................................................................................... Concrete Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 – METALS 05 50 00 ............................................................................................................................. Metal Fabrications 05 52 00 .................................................................................................................................... Metal Railings DIVISION 6 – NOT USED DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION


07 84 00 ...................................................................................................................................... Firestopping 07 90 00 ................................................................................................................................. Joint Protection DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS 08 31 13 ................................................................................................................ Access Doors and Frames DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 09 90 00 ......................................................................................................................... Painting and Coating 09 96 23 ......................................................................................................................... Anti-Graffiti Coatings DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 28 00 ............................................................................................................................. Toilet Accessories DIVISION 11 – NOT USED DIVISION 12 – NOT USED DIVISION 21 – NOT USED DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 01 00 .......................................................................................................... Basic Plumbing Requirements 22 05 00 ................................................................................................ Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 16 ........................................................................... Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping 22 05 19 ................................................................................................ Meters & Gages for Plumbing Piping 22 05 23 ......................................................................................... General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 29 ............................................................. Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 48 ............................................... Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 53 ............................................................................ Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 07 00 ........................................................................................................................... Plumbing Insulation 22 11 16 ......................................................................................................................Domestic Water Piping 22 11 19 ................................................................................................... Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 13 16 ....................................................................................................... Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 22 13 19 .................................................................................................... Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 23 01 00 ............................................................................................................... Basic HVAC Requirements 23 05 00 ..................................................................................................... Common Work Results for HVAC 23 05 13 ....................................................................... Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 23 05 14 .............................................................................................. Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers 23 05 16 ................................................................................ Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping 23 05 19 ..................................................................................................... Meters & Gages for HVAC Piping 23 05 23 .............................................................................................. General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 23 05 29 .................................................................. Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 33 .......................................................................................................... Heat Tracing for HVAC Piping 23 05 48 .................................................... Vibration and Isolation Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 49 ...................................................................................... Seismic Bracing for Mechanical Equipment 23 05 53 ................................................................................ Identifications for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 07 00 ................................................................................................................................ HVAC Insulation 23 09 00 ..............................................................................................Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 23 09 94 ............................................................................... Owner Requirements for Temperature Controls 23 21 13 ................................................................................................................................. Hydronic Piping 23 21 23 ................................................................................................................................ Hydronic Pumps 23 25 00 ............................................................................................................... Chemical Water Treatment 23 65 00 ................................................................................................................................. Cooling Towers


DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 01 00 .......................................................................................................... Basic Electrical Requirements 26 05 19 ..................................................................... Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 .................................................................................Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 ...................................................................................Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 .................................................................................... Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 48 ..................................................................... Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 .................................................................................................. Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 73 .................................................................................... Electrical System Protective Device Studies 26 22 00 ................................................................................................................ Low-Voltage Transformers 26 24 16 ...................................................................................................................................... Panelboards 26 27 26 .................................................................................................................................. Wiring Devices 26 28 13 ................................................................................................................................................ Fuses 26 28 16 .......................................................................................... Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 95 00 .................................................................................................................. Electrical System Testing DIVISION 27 – NOT USED DIVISION 28 – NOT USED

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 22 01 00 Page 1

SECTION 22 01 00

BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Where contradiction occurs between this section and Division 1, the more stringent of the

two shall apply.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Work includes:

1. Provision of labor, material, equipment and transportation required to complete the Work as shown on the drawings, specified herein and/or implied thereby.

B. Applicable provisions of General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and all sections in Division No. 1 “General Requirements” govern work under this section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. “Provide” means furnish and install referenced item with all appurtenances.

B. “Shall” indicates a mandatory requirement.

C. “Or Approved Equal” is defined as approved as equal by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

A. Provide for the safety and good condition of all materials and equipment until final acceptance by the Owner. Protect all materials and equipment from damage from any cause whatever, and provide adequate and proper storage facilities during the progress of the work. Replace all damaged and defective work, material or equipment prior to filing application for final acceptance.

B. Cap or plug openings in equipment, piping, ducts and other systems to exclude entrance of dirt and other foreign material during construction.

C. Material storage shall be the contractor’s responsibility. Coordinate the storage of materials on site prior to purchasing of materials. Storage shall comply with Owner’s Authorized Representative’s requirements.

1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest adopted rules and regulations of the State Fire Marshall; the National Electrical Code (NEC); the Uniform Plumbing Code; local Building Codes and Amendments; the Uniform Mechanical Code; International Building Code; and other applicable codes, laws or regulations of bodies


lawfully empowered and having jurisdiction over this project. Nothing in the plans or specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. When codes conflict with one another, provide larger, higher or more restrictive standards without additional costs.

1.6 PERMITS

A. Obtain all permits, patent rights, and licenses that are required for the performing of this work by all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, or orders of any officer and/or body. Provide all notices necessary in connection therewith, and pay all fees relating thereto and all costs and expenses incurred on account thereof. No work shall be covered before inspection by the jurisdictional authorities and observation by the Architect.

1.7 EXPLANATION AND PRECEDENCE OF DRAWINGS

A. Drawings and specifications are intended to be read together so that any work mentioned in one and not the other shall be executed the same as if mentioned in both.

B. For purposes of clearness and legibility, drawings are essentially diagrammatic, and, although size and location of equipment are drawn to scale where possible, Contractor shall make use of all data in all the contract documents and shall verify this information at building site. At various locations, systems are drawn distorted for clarity.

C. Where the contract specifications and/or drawings are in conflict, obtain clarification of such during bidding. Clarification will only be given in written addendum form. Where addenda for clarification of such is not timely, base the bid on the higher standards or more restrictive requirements; prior to submission of product submittals, preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, obtain written clarification.

D. The drawings indicate required size and points of termination of piping and ductwork, and suggest proper routes to conform to structure avoid obstructions and preserve clearances. However, it is not intended that drawings indicate all necessary offsets, and it shall be the work of the Contractor to make the installation in such a manner as to conform to the structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear, without further instructions or cost to the Owner.

E. It is intended that all plumbing devices, piping, etc. be located symmetrically with all architectural elements. Refer to architectural, structural, electrical, mechanical plans and details in completing the required coordination. All system offsets, unless noted on drawings, shall be rectilinear. Offsets and transitions shall comply with best practices and applicable standards.

F. The Contractor shall fully inform himself regarding any and all peculiarities and limitations of the spaces available for the installation of all work and materials furnished and installed under the Contract. He shall exercise due and particular caution to determine that all parts of his work are made quickly and easily accessible.

G. Submittal of bid shall indicate the Contractor has examined the site, drawings and specifications and has included all required allowances in his bid. No allowances shall be made for any error resulting from Contractor’s failure to visit job site and to review drawings and specifications.


1.8 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Prepare coordination drawings at a scale not less than 1/8” per foot for all areas of work. Submit and receive approval prior to commencing fabrication and/or installation. Major discrepancies from design documents shall be clearly identified.

B. These drawings shall be mutually prepared by all contractors. The sheet metal contractor shall initiate the drawing production. Each additional trade shall add their systems as required to complete full coordination. Each trade shall date and sign composite drawing.

C. If locations arise during construction where multiple disciplinary systems cannot fit in the space allocated as a result of one non-coordinate disciplinary system installation. The general contractor or the subcontractor who fails to coordinate shall be responsible for the system modifications required to make them fit.

D. Where conflicts arise during the completion of the coordination drawings, the general contractor shall determine resolution.

1.9 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Provide and maintain on the job one complete set of blueline prints of the drawings for the plumbing work. Carefully record on this set of prints, all work including ductwork, piping, valves, etc., which is installed differently from that indicated on the drawings; locate dimensionally from fixed points all buried piping including depths relative to finish floor elevations. Mark all changes of location of piping, ducts, and equipment in accordance with Division 1.

B. These drawings shall be continuously kept up-to-date, and shall be available for inspection at all times. Major discrepancies from approved shop drawings shall be clearly identified and resubmitted.

C. At completion of work, provide a neat and legible reproducible set of these up-to-date drawings which shall be individually signed and dated by the Contractor and the job inspector as to their accuracy.

D. Such drawings shall be submitted for acceptance and approval to the Owner’s Authorized Representative before final certificate of acceptance will be issued.

1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Perform all cutting and fitting required for work of this section in rough construction of the building.

B. All patching of finished construction of building shall be performed under the sections of specifications covering these materials by the trades at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. All patching of surfaces shall match adjacent material and finish.

1.11 DAMAGE BY LEAKS

A. Contractor shall be responsible for damage to the grounds, walks, roads, buildings, piping systems, electrical systems and their equipment and contents, caused by leaks in the piping system being installed or having been installed herein. He shall repair at his expense all damage so caused. All repair work shall be done as directed by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.


1.12 EMERGENCY REPAIRS

A. The Owner reserves the right to make emergency repairs as required to keep equipment in operation without voiding the Contractor’s guarantee bond nor relieving the Contractor of his responsibilities.

1.13 COORDINATION

A. The Contractor shall fully inform himself regarding any and all peculiarities and limitations of the spaces available for the installation of all work and materials furnished and installed under the contract. Coordinate with all other trades in advance of the work, requirements for openings, recesses and chases in the walls, partitions, equipment housekeeping pads, framing or openings and routing of piping, ductwork, conduit, etc. relative to each trade to alleviate conflicts. Should furnishing, requesting and coordinating this information be neglected, delayed or incorrect and additional work is found to be required, the cost of same shall be borne by the responsible Contractor.

B. This contractor shall coordinate at minimum the following:

1. All conduit and pipe openings with general contractor. 2. All equipment support locations (hung or floor mounted) with general contractor. 3. All powered equipment locations with the electrical contractor.

1.14 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. If substitutions of controls or equipment requires any changes in the structural design and/or electrical work from that shown on the drawings, the extra cost of the equipment, added structural and/or electrical work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor requesting the substitution.

B. If the Contractor proposes substitutions of any equipment specified herein or on the drawings, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain approval for such equipment as well as approval for anchorage of such equipment from governing approval agencies. All costs required for such approval shall be the responsibility of the Contractor requesting the substitution.

C. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of an approved substitution, make such changes as may be required for the work to be completed and be made compatible with other systems in all respects.

1.15 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. When electrical work is specified in subsequent sections to be furnished and installed by the Plumbing Contractor, it shall be installed in strict and full accordance with the requirements of Division 26.

B. The power wiring, safety switches, combination controllers, (indicated on the electrical drawings), circuit breakers, motor-control equipment forming part of motor control centers or switchgear assemblies, and the electrical connections of the plumbing equipment to the electrical power source shall be provided under Division 26 (unless noted otherwise).

C. The electrical components of plumbing equipment including, but not limited to, motor controllers (starters), control or push-button stations, float/pressure switches, solenoid valves, junction boxes and other devices functioning to control plumbing equipment shall be provided under Division 22. Interconnecting wiring for packaged equipment shall be provided as an integral part of the equipment.


D. Control Wiring: Line voltage wiring and conduit controlling plumbing equipment not shown on electrical drawings shall be provided under Division 22. All low voltage wiring required for controlling plumbing equipment shall be provide under Division 22 (unless otherwise shown on Electrical Drawings). Installation of these items shall comply with Division 26.

1.16 SEISMIC RESTRAINT

A. This contractor shall submit stamped and signed documents by a professional structural engineer registered in the same state as the project certifying that all the associated systems meet the seismic requirements set forth in all the applicable codes associated with the project. This shall apply to all plumbing systems.

1.17 USE OF ENGINEERS DRAWINGS

A. Plumbing Auto CADD drawings will be furnished by Architect/Engineering Firm at contractor’s request via contracting officer. Prior to furnishing such files. Contractor shall provide and sign a disclaimer noting the following:

1. Architect/Engineering Firm is not responsible for any use by the contractor of such drawings.

2. The contractor shall not use such drawings for any purposes other than the associated project.

1.18 COMMISSIONING

A. Commissioning is a comprehensive and systematic process to verify that the building’s energy related systems are installed, calibrated and perform according to the owner’s project requirements, basis of design, and construction documents.

B. Commissioning is a part of this project and all contractors performing work governed by this division of the specification shall refer to Division 1 Specification for complete commissioning requirements that apply to the work within this division. Coordinate commissioning activities with contractor performing work of other sections as applicable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Products and materials shall be described in the pertinent section for Division 22 – Plumbing.

B. Products and materials not specified within the specifications but specified on the drawings shall be as described on the drawings.

C. Materials and equipment: Wherever possible, all materials and/or equipment used for similar service shall be of the same manufacturer.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. All labor shall be carefully skilled for this kind of work and under the direction of a competent foreman (plumbing work).

B. All materials shall be new and in perfect condition.


C. Equipment shall bear the manufacturer’s label showing performance characteristics. Identifying size number shall be given only when it is not practicable or customary to show performance characteristics.

D. Equipment shall bear the label of a nationally recognized listing agency and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation requirements to maintain the listing.

E. All valves, pipe, fitting, etc., shall bear the manufacturer’s name or trademark.

F. Unless otherwise specified herein, all equipment and fixtures shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, including recommended service and removal or clearances.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTS

A. Contractor shall make all tests required by all legally constituted authorities and as follows:

1. All tests shall be made in the presence of the Owner’s Authorized Representative and a duly Authorized inspector. The Owner’s Authorized Representative shall be notified in writing five (5) working days before test are made.

2. Concealed work and insulated work shall remain uncovered until required testing has been performed and approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. If work required to be tested is covered before the approval of the Owner’s Authorized Representative has been obtained, it shall be uncovered for testing at the Contractor’s expense.

3. Obtain all required documents of certification indicating approval, acceptance and compliance with the requirements of all administrative authorities having jurisdiction over the work. No final payment shall be made until all such certificates are delivered to the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

4. Furnish labor, materials, instruments and bear other costs in connection with all test.

5. All piping, equipment and appurtenances shall be capable of operating within the given pressure and temperature characteristics of the project conditions.

6. Before making test, remove or valve off from the system, gauges, traps, and other apparatus or equipment which may be damaged by test pressure.

7. Install a calibrated test pressure gauge in the system to observe any loss in pressure. Maintain the required test pressure for a sufficient length of time to enable an inspection to be made of all joints and connections. Perform tests after installation and prior to acceptance.

8. Final pressures at the end of the test period shall be no more or less than that caused by expansion or contraction of the test medium due to temperature changes.

9. After tests have been made and leaks repaired, clean and flush systems as hereinafter specified. Water piping shall be left under supply main pressure for the balance of the construction period.

3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP

A. Protection: Provide for the safety and good condition of all materials and equipment until final acceptance of the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Protect all materials and equipment from damage from any cause whatever, and provide adequate and proper storage facilities during the progress of the work and replace all damaged and defective


material, equipment or work prior to filing application for final acceptance. Equipment and piping shall be stored at least six inches off the ground on blocking and kept clean. During construction properly cap all ducts, pipes and equipment and appurtenances to prevent the entrance of sand and dirt.

B. Cleaning

1. Thoroughly clean all piping and all parts of the fixtures, apparatus and equipment. Clean all piping apparatus and equipment that are to be insulated prior to installation of insulation. All parts shall be thoroughly cleaned of sand, dirt, cement, plaster, rust, and other materials, and all grease and oil spots removed. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out. All code stamps and nameplates shall be protected from damage and must be clean and legible before final inspection.

2. Exposed rough metal work shall be carefully brushed down with steel brushes to remove rust and other spots and left in clean condition to receive painter’s finish. Where factory prime coat has been damaged, this Contractor shall be responsible for restoration of same.

3. All piping shall be flushed out or blown out after pressure testing is complete and before being put into use. All strainer screens shall be removed and cleaned. After start-up and testing, strainer screens shall again be removed and cleaned.

3.3 STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. Provide all materials, equipment, supplies and labor necessary to construct all structural steel required for supporting piping and equipment and miscellaneous steel work shown on the Drawings; as herein specified, or as may be required for installation of the plumbing system.

B. All miscellaneous structural steel for support of plumbing work is not shown on the Drawings. Whether structural steel is shown or not shown on the drawings, it shall be provided. The Contractor shall confirm all structural steel sized components which are shown on the drawings.

C. Structural steel shall be provided in the following locations

1. For all piping mounted below a roof with metal deck construction. 2. For all pipe supports for piping 200mm in diameter and larger. 3. At the bottom of all pipe risers 150mm in diameter and larger. 4. For all pipe anchors and pipe guides. 5. For all pipe racks. 6. For all pipe hangers which are not listed or shown in reputable pipe hanger

manufacturer catalogues or shown in the latest issue of MSS SP69.

D. All structural steel shall be designed to attach to the main building structure in such a manner as to not over stress this structure.

E. Structural design shall be provided through the Contractor by a Civil or Structural Engineer who is registered in the State of Nevada.

F. Details of all structural steel shall be provided in shop drawing format. All structural steel shop drawings shall be stamped by the Contractor’s design Engineer prior to submittal. All attachments to building structure shall be approved by the project structural engineer prior to fabrication or installation.


G. The design, materials, fabrication and erection shall conform to “Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings” of the American Institute of Steel Construction, “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”, of the American Institute of Steel Construction, and also, when applicable, shall conform to the “Code for Welding Building Construction” of the American Welding Society.

H. The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting and patching fireproofing, as required, when connecting new miscellaneous steel to the building structure.

3.4 COMMISSIONING AND PRELIMINARY OPERATIONAL TEST

A. Prior to inspection to determine substantial completion, the Contractor shall put all plumbing systems into service and check that work required for that purpose has been done, including but not limited to the following condensed check list

1. Correct rotation of motors and ratings of overload heaters are verified. 2. Specified clean filters are installed and spares are on hand when specified. 3. All equipment has been started, checked, lubricated and adjusted in accordance

with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. All manufacturers certificates of start-up specified have been delivered to the

Owners Authorized Representative. 5. All equipment has been cleaned, and damaged painted finishes touched-up. 6. Flushing and chemical treatment of piping systems has been done and water

treatment equipment, where specified, is in operation. 7. Equipment labels, pipe marker labels, ceiling markers and valve tags are

installed. 8. Valve tag schedules, correct control diagrams, sequence of operation lists and

start-stop instructions have been posted. 9. Test and balance work is complete. 10. Maintenance manuals have been delivered and instructions to the Owners

operating personnel have been made. 11. Provide all instruments, equipment, labor and materials to complete the tests.

These tests may be required at any time between the installation of the work and the end of the warranty period. Should these tests expose any defective materials, poor workmanship or variance with requirements, make any changes necessary and remedy any defects at no cost to the Owner.

B. Prior to the inspection to determine substantial completion, the Contractor shall operate all plumbing systems as required to demonstrate that the installation and performance of these systems conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. Before handing over the system to Owner, replace temporary filters with complete new set of filters.

3.5 REVIEW OF CONTRACTOR’S TEST

A. All tests made by the Contractor or manufacturer’s representatives are subject to observation and review by the Owner’s Authorized Representative and Commissioning agent; the Contractor shall provide written notice five (5) days prior to testing. Testing shall be grouped and sequential as practical.

3.6 TEST LOGS

A. The contract shall maintain test logs listing the tests on all HVAC systems showing dates, items tested, inspector’s names, remarks on success or failure of the tests.


3.7 CLEANING UP AND REMOVAL OR SCRAP

A. For work under all plumbing sections, trash and scrap shall be cleaned up and removed from the site as the work progresses.

3.8 DAMAGE RESPONSIBILITY

A. The contractor shall be responsible for damage to the grounds, buildings or equipment, and the loss of refrigerants, fuels or gases, caused by leaks or breaks in pipes for equipment furnished or installed under this Division.

3.9 PRELIMINARY OPERATION

A. The Owner reserves the right to operate portions of the plumbing system on a preliminary basis without voiding the guarantee.

3.10 OPERATIONAL TEST

A. Before operational tests are performed, demonstrate that all systems and components are complete and fully charged with operating fluid and lubricants.

B. Systems shall be operable and capable of maintaining continuous uninterrupted operation during the operating and demonstration period. After all systems have been completely installed, connections made, and tests completed, operate the systems continuously for a period of five (5) working days during the hours of a normal working day.

C. Control systems shall be completely operable with settings properly calibrated and adjusted.

D. Rotating equipment shall be in dynamic balance and alignment.

E. If the system fails to operate continuously during the test period, the deficiencies shall be corrected and the entire test repeated.

3.11 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS, ETC.

A. General: Thoroughly instruct the Owner’s operators in every detail of operation of the system. Provide the Owner with a list of all equipment, giving the manufacturer’s name, model number, serial number, parts list and complete internal wiring diagrams. All directions for operation furnished by the manufacturer shall be carefully saved and turned over to the Owner, together with written sequence of operation, operating and maintenance instructions for each system and its equipment. Coordinate scheduling of instruction times with Owner’s operators.

B. Specific Data: Provide complete sets of documentation in accordance with Division 1 requirements. Where quantities are not clearly defined in Division 1, submit four (4) complete sets. The following data shall be submitted to the Owner for approval prior to acceptance of the installation, complete and at one time; (partial or separate data will not be accepted) data shall consist of the following:

1. Valve Directory: Indicating valve number, location, function and normal operating position for each.

2. Piping identification schedule. 3. Equipment: List of nameplates, including nameplate data.


4. Manufacturer’s Literature: Copies of manufacturer’s instructions for operation and maintenance of all mechanical equipment, including replacement parts lists and drawings. Mark or highlight brochure literature indicating the models, sizes, capacities, curve operating points, etc., in a manner to clearly indicate the equipment in-stalled. Remove all pages or sheets from the bulletin and catalogs that do not pertain to equipment installed on the project.

5. Written Instructions: Typewritten instructions for operation and maintenance of the system composed or OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS, MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE. a. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS shall contain a brief description of the

system. Adjustments requiring the technical knowledge of the service agency personnel shall not be included in the operating instructions. The fact such adjustments are required, however, shall be noted.

b. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS shall list each item of equipment requiring inspection, lubrication or service and describe the performance of such maintenance.

c. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE shall list each item of equipment requiring maintenance, shall show the exact type of bearing on every component of each item of equipment, and shall show when each item of equipment should be inspected or serviced.

6. Instructions: Operating personnel shall be instructed in the operation of the system in accordance with typewritten, approved instructions.

7. Letters of certification as required under other sections. 8. A CD or similar electronic storages media including original PDF files for each of

the above shall be included with each copy. Furnish a dedicated index of the electronic media contents identifying the file name associated with each document.

C. Binders: Assemble sets of the above data in loose-leaf ring-type binders with permanent covers, with identification on front and on spine. Provide appropriate sleeve for electronic media.

D. The above shall in no way preclude the requirements of other sections of these specifications – and is to be supplemental to other paragraphs on this subject found in this section and other sections.

3.12 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. During the guarantee period and as directed by the Owner, make any additional tests, adjustment, etc., that may be required and correct any defects or deficiencies arising from operation of the systems. Operational tests shall be made during both heating and cooling seasons and on all systems.

B. Guards: Furnish and install removable guards around all moving parts of all equipment and/or apparatus. Guards shall be securely anchored to floor or equipment, and shall provide protection at ends and sides to prevent contract with sheaves, belts, couplings, etc. Holes in suitable locations shall be provided for measuring speeds.

C. Completion:

1. When the installation is complete and adjustments specified herein have been made, the system shall be operated for a period of one week, during which time it shall be demonstrated to the Owner’s Authorized Representative as being completed and operating in conformance with these specifications. The Contractor shall schedule all work so that this time period, which is to confirm a


“bug-free” system, will occur be-fore the total project is accepted for substantial completion by Owner.

2. The work hereunder shall not be reviewed for final acceptance until operating and maintenance data, manufacturer’s literature, valve directories, piping identification code directory, and nameplates specified herein have been approved and properly posted in the building.

3.13 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY

A. Guarantees and warranties shall be as defined in Division 1 Sections.

B. All materials, apparatus and equipment furnished and installed under the plumbing division of these specifications, shall be new and fee from any defects. Should any problems develop within one year from date of acceptance of the work, due to inferior or faulty materials and/or workmanship, the problems shall be corrected by this Contractor without expense to the Owner. Any defective materials or inferior workmanship noticed at the time of installation or during the guarantee period shall be corrected immediately to the entire satisfaction of the Owner.

C. The work shall be installed of such materials and in such a manner that:

1. All apparatus or equipment shall operate in accordance with detailed specifications covering each item.

2. Contractor shall guarantee that his installation of all materials and equipment will meet the performance requirements of these specifications and that all equipment will deliver the specified or required capacities.

3. The Owner reserves the right to make temporary or emergency repairs as necessary to keep equipment in operating condition without voiding the guarantee contained herein nor relieving the Contractor of his responsibilities during the guarantee period.

4. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to any part of the premises caused by leaks or break in pipe lines, fixtures or equipment furnished and installed under his contract for a period of one year after date of acceptance of the project by Owner. He shall replace in kind, at his own expense, any and all items so damaged to the complete satisfaction of the Owner.

5. The above shall be supplemental to and in no way preclude the requirements of other sections of these specifications

6. After operation of any liquid system and if any piping, coils or other components be-come air bound, this contractor shall make all necessary system modifications including but not limited to repiping (as approved), installation or air vents or fittings at no extra cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION 22 01 00

UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 22 05 00 Page 1

SECTION 22 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 9. Painting and finishing. 10. Concrete bases. 11. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:


1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.


2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze

flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel

flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise

indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

1. Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div.


c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Smith-Blair, Inc. f. Viking Johnson.

2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.

3. Underground Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling.

4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

1. Manufacturers: a. Eslon Thermoplastics. b. Approved equal

C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

1. Manufacturers: a. Thompson Plastics, Inc. b. Approved equal

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.

1. Manufacturers: a. NIBCO INC. b. Approved equal

E. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

1. Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Fernco, Inc. c. Mission Rubber Company. d. Plastic Oddities, Inc.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C).

1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company.


c. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc. e. Hart Industries, International, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).

1. Manufacturers: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp. c. Approved equal

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).

1. Manufacturers: a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America.

2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc.


c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of

length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.7 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.

G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.


H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.9 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-

pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-

plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.


d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw.

h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass finish.

i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw set screw or spring clips.

j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with

set screw. l. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-

plate type.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment

areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear

space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150). b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger, penetrating

gypsum-board partitions. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane

waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing. 1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.


1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in

diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.


G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC

socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138

Appendix.

J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.


C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.6 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and

reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Sections.

3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.


3.9 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 22 05 16 Page 1

SECTION 22 05 16

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Flexible-hose packless expansion joints. 2. Pipe loops and swing connections. 3. Alignment guides and anchors.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures.

B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Flexible-Hose Packless Expansion Joints:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. b. Flexicraft Industries. c. Flex Pression Ltd. d. Metraflex, Inc. e. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.

2. Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two flexible-metal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section of flexible hose.

3. Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths. 4. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Copper-alloy

fittings with solder-joint end connections.


a. Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F (3100 kPa at 21 deg C) and 340 psig at 450 deg F (2340 kPa at 232 deg C) ratings.

b. Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze sheaths with 700 psig at 70 deg F (4830 kPa at 21 deg C) and 500 psig at 450 deg F (3450 kPa at 232 deg C) ratings.

5. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Copper-alloy fittings with threaded end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 300

psig at 70 deg F (2070 kPa at 21 deg C) and 225 psig at 450 deg F (1550 kPa at 232 deg C) ratings.

b. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 420 psig at 70 deg F (2890 kPa at 21 deg C) and 315 psig at 450 deg F (2170 kPa at 232 deg C) ratings.

6. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Stainless-steel fittings with threaded end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 450



7. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6 (DN 65 to DN 150): Stainless-steel fittings with flanged end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 200



8. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): Stainless-steel fittings with flanged end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 125



2.2 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS

A. Alignment Guides:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Adsco Manufacturing LLC. b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. c. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. d. Flexicraft Industries. e. Flex-Weld, Inc. f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. g. Metraflex, Inc. h. Senior Flexonics Pathway. i. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc. j. U.S. Bellows, Inc.


2. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.

B. Anchor Materials:

1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head. 3. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. 4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for

use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel. b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel. c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

5. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud, bonding-system anchor for use with hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. a. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-

component epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed.

b. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud unless otherwise indicated.

c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION

A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed.

B. Install metal-bellows expansion joints according to EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc."

C. Install rubber packless expansion joints according to FSA-NMEJ-702.

D. Install grooved-joint expansion joints to grooved-end steel piping

3.2 PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.

B. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings including tee in main.

C. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including tee in riser.

D. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including tee in main.

3.3 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.


B. Install two guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest to expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint.

C. Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure.

D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

E. Anchor Attachments:

1. Anchor Attachment to Black-Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

2. Anchor Attachment to Galvanized-Steel Pipe: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, Type 42, riser clamp welded to anchor.

3. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, Type 24, U-bolts bolted to anchor.

F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding. 2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow

fastener manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 22 05 19 Page 1

SECTION 22 05 19

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers. 2. Filled-system thermometers. 3. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 4. Light-activated thermometers. 5. Thermowells. 6. Dial-type pressure gages. 7. Gage attachments. 8. Test plugs. 9. Test-plug kits. 10. Sight flow indicators.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters inside the building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Ashcroft Inc. 2. Ernst Flow Industries. 3. Marsh Bellofram. 4. Nanmac Corporation. 5. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. 6. Trerice, H. O. Co. 7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 8. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Standard: ASME B40.200.

C. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 3-inch (76-mm) nominal diameter.

D. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F (deg C).

E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle with unified-inch screw threads.


F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm) with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch (6.4 or 9.4 mm) in diameter; stainless steel.

H. Window: Plain glass or plastic.

I. Ring: Stainless steel.

J. Element: Bimetal coil.

K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

2.2 FILLED-SYSTEM THERMOMETERS

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ashcroft Inc. b. Ernst Flow Industries. c. Marsh Bellofram. d. Nanmac Corporation. e. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. f. Trerice, H. O. Co. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Weiss Instruments, Inc

2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Sealed type, cast aluminum or drawn steel 6-inch (152-mm) nominal

diameter. 4. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element. 5. Movement: Mechanical, dampening type, with link to pressure element and

connection to pointer. 6. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated

in deg F (deg C. 7. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 8. Window: Glass or plastic. 9. Ring: Metal. 10. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360

degrees in horizontal plane, with locking device with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 11. Thermal System: Liquid-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass

stem and of length to suit installation. a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

12. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

2.3 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: b. Ashcroft Inc. c. Ernst Flow Industries. d. Marsh Bellofram. e. Nanmac Corporation. f. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.


g. Trerice, H. O. Co. h. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. i. Weiss Instruments, Inc

2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Cast aluminum 6-inch (152-mm) nominal size. 4. Case Form: Back angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings graduated in deg F (deg C). 7. Window: Glass or plastic. 8. Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation. 9. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 10. Connector: 3/4 inch (19 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 11. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a

maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range.

2.4 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee

fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES or CSA. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, (DN 15, DN 20, or NPS 25,)

ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch (13, 19, and 25 mm), with ASME B1.1

screw threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.5 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ashcroft Inc. b. Ernst Flow Industries. c. Marsh Bellofram. d. Nanmac Corporation. e. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. f. Trerice, H. O. Co. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Weiss Instruments, IncStandard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Sealed type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel 4-1/2-inch (114-mm)

nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15),

ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.


6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated

in psi (kPa). 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass or plastic. 10. Ring: Metal. 11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.6 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15 ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.7 TEST PLUGS


1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 3. Trerice, H. O. Co. 4. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 5. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) or NPS 1/2 (DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F (3450 kPa at 93 deg C).

F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber.

2.8 TEST-PLUG KITS


1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 3. Trerice, H. O. Co. 4. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 5. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Furnish one test-plug kit(s) containing one thermometer(s), one pressure gage and adapter, and carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.


C. Low-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- (25- to 51-mm diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 25 to 125 deg F (minus 4 to plus 52 deg C).

D. High-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- (25- to 51-mm-) diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 220 deg F (minus 18 to plus 104 deg C).

E. Pressure Gage: Small, Bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch- (51- to 76-mm-) diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig (0 to 1380 kPa.

F. Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding.

2.9 SIGHT FLOW INDICATORS


1. Archon Industries, Inc. 2. Dwyer Instruments, Inc. 3. Ernst Flow Industries.

B. Description: Piping inline-installation device for visual verification of flow.

C. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and paddle wheel indicator, and threaded or flanged ends.

D. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1034 kPa).

E. Minimum Temperature Rating: 200 deg F (93 deg C).

F. End Connections for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded.

G. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches (51 mm) into fluid and in vertical position in piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.


G. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

H. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.

I. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

J. Install test plugs in piping tees.

K. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater. 2. Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger. 3. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank. 4. Inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller.

L. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Building water service entrance into building. 2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve. 3. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be one of the following:

1. Liquid-filled or Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type. 2. Direct-mounted, metal-case, vapor-actuated type. 3. Compact -style, liquid-in-glass type. 4. Direct -mounted, light-activated type. 5. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self-sealing

rubber inserts.

B. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled or Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type. 2. Direct-mounted, metal-case, vapor-actuated type. 3. Compact-style, liquid-in-glass type. 4. Direct -mounted, light-activated type. 5. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self-sealing

rubber inserts.

C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled or Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type.


2. Direct-mounted, metal-case, vapor-actuated type. 3. Compact-style, liquid-in-glass type. 4. Direct-mounted, light-activated type. 5. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self-sealing

rubber inserts.

D. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F (Minus 20 to plus 50 deg C.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be the following:

1. Sealed direct-mounted, metal case. 2. Sealed direct-mounted, plastic case. 3. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self-sealing

rubber inserts.

B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each water pressure-reducing valve shall be the following:

1. Sealed-mounted, metal case. 2. Sealed direct-mounted, plastic case. 3. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self-sealing

rubber inserts.

C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each domestic water pump shall be the following:

1. Sealed-mounted, metal case. 2. Sealed direct-mounted, plastic case. 3. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self-sealing

rubber inserts.

3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 160 psi (0 to 1100 kPa.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi (0 to 1100 kPa).


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 22 05 23 Page 1

SECTION 22 05 23

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze ball valves. 2. Butterfly valves. 3. Iron, grooved-end butterfly valves. 4. Bronze swing check valves. 5. Bronze gate valves. 6. Lubricated plug valves.


1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.

2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.


2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set gate valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature.

If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger. 2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller. 4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for

every 10 plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions and the following features:

1. Gate Valves: With rising stem. 2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material,

and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

F. Valve-End Connections:


1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. 3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. e. Red-White Valve Corporation. f. Watts Regulator Co.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full.

2.3 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with NBR Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:

B. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. DeZurik Water Controls. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at

rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Stainless steel.


2.4 IRON, GROOVED-END BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 175 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. b. Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products. c. Victaulic Company. d. Nibco.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). c. Body Material: Coated, ductile iron. d. Stem: Two-piece stainless steel. e. Disc: Coated, ductile iron. f. Seal: EPDM.

2.5 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.

2.6 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Class 150, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hammond Valve. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa). c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring

bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.


2.7 LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES

A. Class 125, Regular-Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Nordstrom Valves, Inc. b. DeZurik

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-78, Type II. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M or ASTM A 126, cast iron with

lubrication-sealing system. d. Pattern: Regular or short. e. Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install chainwheels on operators for ball, butterfly and gate valves NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger and more than 96 inches (2400 mm) above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches (1520 mm) above finished floor.

F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.


3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate valves. 2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type. 3. Throttling Service: ball or butterfly valves. 4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.

b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger for Domestic Water: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with spring or iron, center-guided, metal or resilient seat check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except

where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends. 7. For Grooved-End Copper Tubing and Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.

3.5 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 3 (DN 75) and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim. 3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, bronze disc. 4. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 150, NRS. 5. Bronze Globe Valves:Class 150, bronze disc.

B. Pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100). May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.

2. Iron Ball Valves: Class 150. 3. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, ductile-iron or

stainless-steel disc. 4. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves: 300 CWP. 5. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 250, metal seats. 6. Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves: 300 CWP.


7. Iron Gate Valves: Class 250, NRS.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 Page 1

SECTION 22 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Fiberglass pipe hangers. 4. Metal framing systems. 5. Fiberglass strut systems. 6. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 7. Fastener systems. 8. Pipe stands. 9. Pipe positioning systems. 10. Equipment supports.


1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Division 21 fire-suppression piping Sections for pipe hangers for fire-suppression piping.

3. Division 22 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides and anchors.

4. Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.


3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion

to support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. Flex-Strut Inc. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: MFMA-4. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.


5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.

6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 7. Metallic Coating: Electroplated zinc, Hot-dipped galvanized. 8. Paint Coating: Vinyl, Vinyl alkyd, Epoxy. 9. Plastic Coating: PVC. 10. Combination Coating:

B. Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc. b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. Haydon Corporation; H-Strut Division. e. NIBCO INC. f. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. g. PHS Industries, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips. 5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into

channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 7. Coating: PVC.

2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS


1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. Clement Support Services. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 5. PHS Industries, Inc. 6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. 9. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862-kPa) minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862-kPa) minimum compressive strength.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.


F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.6 PIPE STANDS

A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Base: Stainless steel. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel,

continuous-thread rods. 4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or

stainless-steel, roller-type pipe support.

E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Bases: One or more; plastic. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels. 4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel. 5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.

F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from structural-steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.

2.7 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.

2.8 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.


2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs.

G. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. See Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for requirements for pipe positioning systems for plumbing fixtures.


H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

I. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

K. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

L. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

M. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

O. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project

through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger

shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building

services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier

is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel

weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel

weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and

0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick. b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm)

thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and

0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and

0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-

insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping

insulation.



A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and

so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40 mm).

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.


B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant attachments for hostile environment applications.

G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing.

H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F (566 deg C), pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24 (DN 100 to DN 600), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36 (DN 20 to DN 900), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 (DN 15 to DN 600) if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 15 to DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).

7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8 (DN 10 to DN 200).

11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3 (DN 10 to DN 80).

12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.


14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900) if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN 25 to DN 750), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24 (DN 65 to DN 600), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN 50 to DN 1050) if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 (DN 50 to DN 600) if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 (DN 50 to DN 750) if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.

K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 24 to DN 600).

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600) if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various

types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C)

piping installations.

M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.


4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required

tangent to flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from

above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg). b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg). c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is

required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to

linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected


equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze

member.

P. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

Q. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

R. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

S. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 48 Page 1

SECTION 22 05 48

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric hangers. 2. Restraining braces and cables. 3. Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.


A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Occupancy Category: 111 2. SDS: 0.443 3. SD1: 0.258 4. Seismic Design Category: D 5. Seismic Importance Factor: 1.25


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproved by ICC-ES, or preapproved by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and


tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Kinetics Noise Control. 2. Mason Industries. 3. Vibro-Acoustics.

B. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings:

1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control. 3. Mason Industries. 4. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC. 5. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 6. Vibro-Acoustics

D. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

E. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

F. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

G. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.


H. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

I. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

J. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

K. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

L. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.3 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for

exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to

indicate capacity range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.


C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inches (3.2 mm).

2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

B. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet (12 m) o.c., and longitudinal

supports a maximum of 80 feet (24 m) o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet (3.7 m).

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

F. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

G. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

H. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.


6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for piping flexible connections.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until

satisfactory results are achieved.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of sprint isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

3.7 VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE APPLICATION

A. Hot water recirculating pumps:


1. Hot water recirculating pumps shall be suspended with elastomeric hangers. One hanger shall support the pump at the inlet flange and one hanger shall support the pump at the outlet flange.

2. Flexible pipe connectors shall be installed directly at the inlet and outlet flanges of the pump.

3. Electrical conduit connections to the pump shall be flexible.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 22 05 53 Page 1

SECTION 22 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Stencils. 5. Valve tags. 6. Warning tags.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with

substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.


C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: Red.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.

2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch (19 mm) for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.


1. Stencil Material: Aluminum. 2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel black unless otherwise indicated.

Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. 3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1

unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.6 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches (75 by 133 mm) minimum. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or

"DO NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09.

B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system.


1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal

units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of

concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals

to [25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced

labels.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) round. b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) round.

2. Valve-Tag Color: a. Cold Water: Natural. b. Hot Water: Natural.

3. Letter Color: a. Cold Water: Black. b. Hot Water: Black.

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements PLUMBING INSULATION March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 22 07 00 Page 1

SECTION 22 07 00

PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulation Materials: a. Flexible elastomeric. b. Mineral fiber. c. Polyisocyanurate.

2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Mastics. 5. Lagging adhesives. 6. Sealants. 7. Factory-applied jackets. 8. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh. 9. Field-applied cloths. 10. Field-applied jackets. 11. Tapes. 12. Securements. 13. Corner angles.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 21 Section "Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation." 2. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.


C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Use materials indicated for the completed Work.

1. Piping Mockups: a. One 10-foot (3-m) section of NPS 2 (DN 50) straight pipe. b. One each of a 90-degree threaded, welded, and flanged elbow. c. One each of a threaded, welded, and flanged tee fitting. d. One NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller valve, and one NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) or

larger valve. e. Four support hangers including hanger shield and insert. f. One threaded strainer and one flanged strainer with removable portion of

insulation. g. One threaded reducer and one welded reducer. h. One pressure temperature tap. i. One mechanical coupling.

2. Equipment Mockups: One tank or vessel. 3. For each mockup, fabricate cutaway sections to allow observation of application

details for insulation materials, adhesives, mastics, attachments, and jackets. 4. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting insulation application. 6. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

7. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

8. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.

G. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type V, without factory-applied jacket.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Johns Manville; HTB 23 Spin-Glas. b. Owens Corning; High Temperature Flexible Batt Insulations.

H. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For equipment applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board. f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.

I. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory-applied jacket.


1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. b. Johns Manville; 1000 Series Spin-Glas. c. Owens Corning; High Temperature Industrial Board Insulations. d. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta Board. e. Roxul Inc.; Roxul RW. f. Thermafiber; Thermafiber Industrial Felt.

J. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

K. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied FSK jacket complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m) or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F (55 deg C) is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.042 W/m x K) or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.

L. Polyisocyanurate: Unfaced, preformed, rigid cellular polyisocyanurate material intended for use as thermal insulation.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Apache Products Company; ISO-25. b. Dow Chemical Company (The); Trymer. c. Duna USA Inc.; Corafoam. d. Elliott Company; Elfoam.

2. Comply with ASTM C 591, Type I or Type IV, except thermal conductivity (k-value) shall not exceed 0.19 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.027 W/m x K) at 75 deg F (24 deg C) after 180 days of aging.

3. Flame-spread index shall be 25 or less and smoke-developed index shall be 50 or less for thickness up to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) as tested by ASTM E 84.

4. Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. 5. Factory-Applied Jacket: Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"

Article. a. Pipe Applications: PVDC-SSL. b. Equipment Applications: PVDC-SSL.


2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I. b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.

B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Thermal-V-Kote.

C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote. b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote. c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.

2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.


D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.



E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding

Adhesive. c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. d. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.


2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of <Insert value> g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40. f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C).

4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-30. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-35. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-25. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 501. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-10.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.03 metric perm) at 35-mil (0.9-mm) dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C). 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.


1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Encacel. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 60-95/60-96. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 570. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-70.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.033 metric perm) at 30-mil (0.8-mm) dry film thickness.



E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-10. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35-00. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50. f. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms (2 metric perms) at 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) dry film thickness.


4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of <Insert value> g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30. e. Vimasco Corporation; 136.

3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over equipment and pipe insulation.


5. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass and Polyisocyanurate Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.


b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444. f. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F (Minus 73 to plus 149

deg C). 5. Color: White or gray. 6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121

deg C). 5. Color: Aluminum. 6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less


C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.


deg C). 5. Color: White. 6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less


2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

4. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- (0.10-mm-) thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms (0.013 metric perms) when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.


a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film

and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. 5. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick, white PVDC

biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms (0.007 metric perms) when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: 1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film

and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. 6. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-

based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: 1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film

and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: Color-code jackets based on system. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field

fabricate. a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves,

flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

5. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.

C. Metal Jacket:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14. a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- (0.025-mm-) thick, heat-

bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-

bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.


2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows.

3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers

are not available.

D. Underground Direct-Buried Jacket: 125-mil- (3.2-mm-) thick vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a woven-glass fiber or polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittwrap. b. Polyguard; Insulrap No Torch 125. c. Approved equal

2.9 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm). 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mm). 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555.


b. Compac Corp.; 130. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC

tape. d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

2. Width: 2 inches (50 mm). 3. Thickness: 6 mils (0.15 mm). 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch (0.7 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch (3.3 N/mm) in width.

D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. b. Compac Corp.; 120. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.

2. Width: 2 inches (50 mm). 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils (0.093 mm). 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch (1.1 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch (6.2 N/mm) in width.

E. PVDC Tape: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape.

2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Film Thickness: [4 mils (0.10 mm)] [6 mils ((0.15 mm))]. 4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). 5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch (10.1 N/mm) in width.

2.10 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Products; Bands. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with wing or closed seal.

3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with wing or closed seal.

4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Stainless steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following:


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Staunless steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) galvanized carbon-steel washer. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T. 2) GEMCO; Perforated Base. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.

b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square.

c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel fully annealed, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150. 2) GEMCO; R-150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, stainless steel.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. C & F Wire. b. Childers Products. c. PABCO Metals Corporation. d. RPR Products, Inc.


2.11 CORNER ANGLES

A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils (0.8 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm), PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.

B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm), aluminum according to ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.

C. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm), stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or 316.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils (0.127 mm) thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils (0.127 mm) thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F (60 and 149 deg C). Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F (0 and 149 deg C) with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.


B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material

as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at [2 inches (50 mm)] [4 inches (100 mm)] o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.


M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof

surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm).

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" and fire-resistive joint sealers.


F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Mineral Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints.

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers

on sides of tanks and vessels as follows: a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels. b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service

temperature and with substrate. c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches (75 mm)

from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. in both directions.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads

of tanks and vessels. f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend

parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials.

6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches (150 mm) from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.

7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches (75 mm). 8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,

handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection.

9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates.

10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels.


1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.

C. Insulation Installation on Pumps:

1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch (150-mm) centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism.

2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick. 3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and

penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.

3.6 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.


8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.7 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus

twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.


2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.8 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus


circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.



2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.


3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.9 POLYISOCYANURATE INSULATION INSTALLATION


1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with tape or bands and tighten without deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3 and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe.

2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier system.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, same

thickness of adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) thickness.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyisocyanurate block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

C. Insulation Installation on Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.


1. Install preformed sections of polyisocyanurate insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation

without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.10 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams and joints.

2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of lagging adhesive.

3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.


3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-

mm-) wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed

insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.

C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.

E. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.

2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches (50 mm) over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint.

3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond.

4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches (850 mm) or less. The 33-1/2-inch- (850-mm-) circumference limit allows for 2-inch- (50-mm-) overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.

5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.

3.11 FINISHES

A. Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.


D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.





1. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.

2. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.13 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.

C. Domestic water pump insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inch (25 mm) thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. (32-kg/cu. m) nominal density.

D. Domestic hot-water pump insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inch (25 mm) thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. (32-kg/cu. m) nominal density.

E. Domestic hot-water storage tank insulation shall be the following, of thickness to provide an R-value of 12.5:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 2-lb/cu. ft. (32-kg/cu. m) nominal density. 2. Mineral-fiber pipe and tank.

3.14 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:


1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.15 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:

1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. c. Polyisocyanurate: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Larger: Insulation shall be the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. c. Polyisocyanurate: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

B. Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

C. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F (16 Deg C):

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. b. Polyisocyanurate: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

D. Hot Service Vents:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I or II: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

3.16 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Water Piping:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. b. Polyisocyanurate: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.

3.17 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches (1200 mm) in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches (1800 mm):

1. PVC, Color-Coded by System: 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick. 2. Aluminum, Smooth 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick.


D. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches (1200 mm) in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches (1800 mm):

1. Aluminum with 1-1/4-Inch- (32-mm-) Deep Corrugations.

E. Piping, Exposed:

1. PVC, Color-Coded by System: 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick. 2. Painted Aluminum, Smooth: 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements DOMESTIC WATER PIPING March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 22 11 16 Page 1

SECTION 22 11 16

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building.

2. Encasement for piping. 3. Specialty valves. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Water meters furnished by utility company for installation by Contractor. 6. Water meters.

B. Related Section:

1. Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water-service piping outside the building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.


A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on piping.

C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Owner's written permission.


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) and water tube, drawn temper.

1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. 2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure

fittings. 3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. 4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-

and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. 5. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division. 2) NIBCO INC. 3) Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems.

b. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.

c. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A water tube, annealed temper.

1. Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. 2. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division. 2) NIBCO INC. 3) Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems.

b. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.

c. NPS 3 and NPS 4 (DN 80 and DN 100): Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.

2.3 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Standard-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron. 2. Compact-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile iron.


a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Standard-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron. a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

2. Compact-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile iron. a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

C. Plain-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151.

1. Grooved-Joint, Ductile-Iron-Pipe Appurtenances: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the following: 1) Anvil International. 2) Shurjoint Piping Products. 3) Star Pipe Products. 4) Victaulic Company.

b. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Fittings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron castings or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching pipe.

c. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron-Pipe Couplings: AWWA C606 for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water, and bolts and nuts.

2.4 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

B. Form: Sheet or Tube.

C. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008-inch (0.20-mm) minimum thickness or high-density, cross-laminated PE film of 0.004-inch (0.10-mm).

D. Color: Black.

2.5 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty metal valves.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers.


A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.


C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing. b. Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The). d. JCM Industries. e. Romac Industries, Inc. f. Smith-Blair, Inc; a Sensus company. g. Viking Johnson; c/o Mueller Co.

2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 2. Flexicraft Industries. 3. Flex Pression, Ltd. 4. Flex-Weld, Inc. 5. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 6. Mercer Rubber Co. 7. Metraflex, Inc. 8. Proco Products, Inc. 9. Tozen Corporation. 10. Unaflex, Inc. 11. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company

B. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 250 psig (1725 kPa). 2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-

end copper tube. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.

C. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 250 psig (1725 kPa). 2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.

2.8 WATER METERS

A. Displacement-Type Water Meters:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AALIANT; a Venture Measurement Product Line. b. ABB. c. Badger Meter, Inc. d. Carlon Meter. e. Mueller Company; Water Products Division. f. Schlumberger Limited; Water Division.


g. Sensus Metering Systems. 2. Description:

a. Standard: AWWA C700. b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure. c. Body Design: Nutating disc; totalization meter. d. Registration: In gallons (liters) or cubic feet (cubic meters) as required by

utility. e. Case: Bronze. f. End Connections: Threaded.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install underground copper tube in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.

E. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

F. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure-reducing valves.

G. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

H. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

I. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.

J. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.


K. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

L. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

M. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

N. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

O. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

P. Install piping free of sags and bends.

Q. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

R. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

S. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages.

T. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Pumps" for thermostats.

U. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.

V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded

or damaged.


D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.

E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.


A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.

D. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller and butterfly valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves.

E. Install calibrated balancing valves in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set calibrated balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for calibrated balancing valves.

3.5 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:


3.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION

A. Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each domestic water pump and in suction and discharge manifold connections to each domestic water booster pump.

B. Install bronze-hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing.

C. Install stainless-steel-hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping.


A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) If Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion

rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS

Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch (10 mm).

E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 (DN 25 and DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch

(10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch

(10-mm) rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.

F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

G. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Smaller: 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.

2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2 (DN 80 and DN 90): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm)

rod.


H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

I. Install vinyl-coated hangers for CPVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: 36 inches (900 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 (DN 32 to DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-

mm) rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch

(13-mm) rod.

J. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping. 2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but

not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes.

4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Piping Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:


a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Piping Tests:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.11 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate

flow. a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return

piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch. b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified

for application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and

operation.

3.12 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:


1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not

appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not

appear at outlets. b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.13 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.

D. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building service piping, NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed.

E. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 4 to NPS 8 (DN 100 to DN 200) and larger, shall be the following:


1. Mechanical-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard pattern mechanical-joint fittings; and mechanical joints.

2. Push-on-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard pattern push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed joints.

3. Plain-end, ductile-iron pipe; grooved-joint, ductile-iron-pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints.

F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B; cast- or wrought- copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

G. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100) shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B; cast or wrought copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

H. Aboveground, combined domestic-water-service and fire-service-main piping, NPS 6 to NPS 12 (DN 150 to DN300) shall be the following:

1. Plain-end, ductile-iron pipe; grooved-joint, ductile-iron-pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints.

2. Galvanized-steel pipe and nipples; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

3. Galvanized-steel pipe; grooved-joint, galvanized-steel-pipe appurtenances; and grooved joints.

3.14 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.

C. Iron grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 22 11 19 Page 1

SECTION 22 11 19

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Water pressure-reducing valves. 4. Balancing valves. 5. Temperature-actuated water mixing valves. 6. Strainers. 7. Outlet boxes. 8. Hose stations. 9. Hose bibbs. 10. Wall hydrants. 11. Ground hydrants. 12. Post hydrants. 13. Drain valves. 14. Water hammer arresters. 15. Air vents. 16. Trap-seal primer valves. 17. Trap-seal primer systems.


1. Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers, pressure gages, and flow meters in domestic water piping.

2. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters. 3. Division 22 Section "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures" for water tempering

equipment. 4. Division 22 Section "Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers" for water filters for

water coolers.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig (860 kPa), unless otherwise indicated.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. NSF Compliance:


1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components.

2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ames Co. b. Cash Acme. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. e. Rain Bird Corporation. f. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1001. 3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 (DN 8 to DN 80), as required to match connected piping. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 6. Finish: Rough bronze.

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc. b. Cash Acme. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. Legend Valve. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Prier Products, Inc. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. h. Woodford Manufacturing Company. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1011. 3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain. 4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7. 5. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.

C. Pressure Vacuum Breakers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ames Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.


g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1020. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 5. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type, on inlet and outlet.

2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cash Acme. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Honeywell Water Controls. e. Legend Valve. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1012. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. End Connections: Union, solder joint. 6. Finish: Rough bronze.

B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ames Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1013. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig (83 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining

complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. 8. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet ofNPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

C. Double-Check Backflow-Prevention Assemblies:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ames Co.


b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1015. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining

complying with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.


7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through flow. 8. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet ofNPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

D. Beverage-Dispensing-Equipment Backflow Preventers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. c. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1022. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8 (DN 8 or DN 10). 5. Body: Stainless steel. 6. End Connections: Threaded.

E. Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cash Acme. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The). f. Honeywell Water Controls. g. Legend Valve. h. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. i. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. k. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1024. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Body: Bronze with union inlet.

F. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.


c. Woodford Manufacturing Company. 2. Standard: ASSE 1052. 3. Operation: Up to 10-foot head of water (30-kPa) back pressure. 4. Inlet Size: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20). 5. Outlet Size: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Capacity: At least 3-gpm (0.19-L/s) flow.

2.3 BALANCING VALVES

A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Flo Fab Inc. c. ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett Div. d. NIBCO INC. e. TAC Americas. f. Taco, Inc. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

2. Type: Ball or Y-pattern globe valve with two readout ports and memory setting indicator.

3. Body: Brass or bronze 4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2 (DN 50). 5. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and

carrying case.

2.4 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Cash Acme. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. Honeywell Water Controls. e. Legend Valve. f. Leonard Valve Company. g. Powers; a Watts Industries Co. h. Symmons Industries, Inc. i. Taco, Inc. j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. k. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1017. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 4. Type: Thermostatically controlled water mixing valve. 5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet. 7. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable,

temperature-control handle.

B. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:


a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc. c. Leonard Valve Company. d. Powers; a Watts Industries Co. e. Symmons Industries, Inc.

2. Standard: ASSE 1017. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 4. Type: Cabinet-type, thermostatically controlled water mixing valve. 5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet. 7. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water

supplies, and adjustable, temperature-control handle. 8. Valve Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Valve Finish: Chrome plated. 10. Piping Finish: Chrome plated. 11. Cabinet: Factory-fabricated, stainless steel, for recessed mounting and with

hinged, stainless-steel door.

C. Manifold, Thermostatic, Water-Mixing-Valve Assemblies:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Leonard Valve Company. b. Powers; a Watts Industries Co. c. Symmons Industries, Inc.

2. Description: Factory-fabricated, cabinet-type, thermostatically controlled, water-mixing-valve assembly in two-valve parallel arrangement.

3. Large-Flow Parallel: Thermostatic water mixing valve and downstream pressure regulator with pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

4. Intermediate-Flow Parallel: Thermostatic water mixing valve and downstream pressure regulator with pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

5. Small-Flow Parallel: Thermostatic water mixing valve. 6. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Comply with ASSE 1017. Include check stops on

hot- and cold-water inlets and shutoff valve on outlet. 7. Water Regulator(s): Comply with ASSE 1003. Include pressure gage on inlet and

outlet. 8. Component Pressure Ratings: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise

indicated. 9. Cabinet: Factory-fabricated, stainless steel, for recessed mounting and with

hinged, stainless-steel door. 10. Thermostatic Mixing Valve and Water Regulator Finish: Chrome plated. 11. Piping Finish: Chrome plated.

D. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Cash Acme. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Honeywell Water Controls. d. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc. e. Leonard Valve Company. f. Powers; a Watts Industries Co. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled water tempering valve. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.


4. Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 5. Temperature Control: Adjustable. 6. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded. 7. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze.

2.5 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining

complying with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.


4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 0.020 inch (0.51 mm. b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): 0.045 inch (1.14 mm).

6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

B. Icemaker Outlet Boxes:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Acorn Engineering Company. b. IPS Corporation. c. LSP Products Group, Inc. d. Oatey. e. Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies.

3. Mounting: Recessed. 4. Material and Finish: Enameled-steel or epoxy-painted-steel box and faceplate. 5. Faucet: Valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include NPS 1/2 (DN 15)

or smaller copper tube outlet. 6. Supply Shutoff Fitting: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) gate, globe, or ball valve and NPS 1/2

(DN 15) copper, water tubing.

2.6 HOSE STATIONS


1. ARCHON Industries, Inc. 2. Armstrong International, Inc. 3. Cooney Brothers, Inc. 4. DynaFluid Ltd. 5. Leonard Valve Company. 6. Strahman Valves, Inc. 7. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.

B. Single-Temperature-Water Hose Stations:

1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1.


2. Cabinet: Stainless-steel enclosure with exposed valve handle, hose connection, and hose rack. Include thermometer in front.

3. Hose-Rack Material: Stainless steel. 4. Body Material: Bronze. 5. Body Finish: Rough bronze. 6. Supply Fitting: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) gate, globe, or ball valve and check valve and

NPS 1/2 (DN 15) copper, water tubing. Omit check valve if check stop is included with fitting.

7. Hose: Manufacturer's standard, for service fluid, temperature, and pressure; 25 feet (7.6 m) long.

8. Nozzle: With hand squeeze on-off control. 9. Vacuum Breaker: Integral or factory-installed, nonremovable, manual-drain-type,

hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011 or backflow preventer complying with ASSE 1052; and garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlet.

2.7 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs:

1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 2. Body Material: Bronze. 3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or solder-

joint inlet. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral or field-installation, nonremovable, drainable, hose-

connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011. 8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. 9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze. 10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. 11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key. 12. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle. 13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key. 14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb. 15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.

2.8 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.

B. Gate-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-80 for gate valves.


2. Pressure Rating: Class 125. 3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4. Body: ASTM B 62 bronze. 5. Inlet: NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded or solder joint. 6. Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass

chain.

C. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for ball valves or MSS SP-80 for gate valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 200-psig (1380-kPa) minimum CWP or Class 125. 3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4. Body: Copper alloy or ASTM B 62 bronze. 5. Drain: NPS 1/8 (DN 6) side outlet with cap.

2.9 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water Hammer Arresters:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. PPP Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. h. Watts Drainage Products Inc. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 3. Type: Copper tube with piston. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.10 AIR VENTS

A. Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze. 2. Pressure Rating: 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F (60

deg C). 3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal. 4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel. 5. Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) minimum inlet. 6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.

2.11 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. MIFAB, Inc. b. PPP Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.


e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1018. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded, union, or solder joint. 6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded or solder joint. 7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not

chrome finished.

B. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. b. Precision Plumbing Products c. Sioux Chief

2. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum, trap makeup connection.

3. Size: NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) minimum. 4. Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass.

2.12 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER SYSTEMS

A. Trap-Seal Primer Systems:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. PPP Inc.

2. Standard: ASSE 1044, 3. Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B 88, Type L (DN 20, ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper,

water tubing. 4. Cabinet: Recessed-mounting steel box with stainless-steel cover. 5. Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120-V ac

power. 6. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with

air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.


C. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory-stop balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

D. Install water control valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with globe valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

E. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

F. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

1. Install thermometers and water regulators if specified. 2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.

G. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve, water pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, and pump.

H. Install outlet boxes recessed in wall. Install blocking wall reinforcement between studs.

I. Install hose stations with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with thermometer on outlet.

1. Install shutoff valve on outlet if specified. 2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.

Install 2-by-4-inch (38-by-89-mm) fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking wall reinforcement between studs. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."

J. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

K. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto floor drain.

L. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

M. Install drainage-type, trap-seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.

N. Install trap-seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper flow.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Sections.

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Sections.


3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:

1. Pressure vacuum breakers. 2. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers. 3. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 4. Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies. 5. Dual-check-valve backflow preventers. 6. Reduced-pressure-detector, fire-protection backflow-preventer assemblies. 7. Double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventers. 8. Water pressure-reducing valves. 9. Calibrated balancing valves. 10. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves. 11. Manifold, thermostatic, water-mixing-valve assemblies. 12. Primary water tempering valves. 13. Outlet boxes. 14. Hose stations. 15. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves. 16. Trap-seal primer systems.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer double-check backflow-prevention assembly and double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 22 13 16 Page 1

SECTION 22 13 16

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings. 3. Encasement for underground metal piping.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.


A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary waste service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.


2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra Heavy class(es).

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.3 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and deaerator drainage fittings.

C. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ANACO-Husky. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. c. Fernco Inc. d. Matco-Norca, Inc. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. g. Stant. h. Tyler Pipe.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. 3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and

tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

D. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ANACO-Husky. b. Clamp-All Corp. c. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. d. MIFAB, Inc. e. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. f. Stant. g. Tyler Pipe.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540. 3. Description: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening

devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

E. Cast-Iron, Hubless-Piping Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. MG Piping Products Company. b. Tyler Pipe. c. Charlotte Pipe.

2. Standard: ASTM C 1277.


3. Description: Two-piece ASTM A 48/A 48M, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.


A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint fittings.

C. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type B and Type C), water tube, drawn temper.

D. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, annealed temper.

E. Copper Pressure Fittings:

1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

F. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end.

1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux.

2.5 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40.

B. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.

C. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235.

1. ABS solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 325 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.6 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.


1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers"

2.7 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the following: 1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. 2) Fernco Inc. 3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies,

Inc. b. Standard: ASTM C 1173. c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern.

Include shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

d. Sleeve Materials: 1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or

ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material

compatible with pipe materials being joined. 4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1460. c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-

resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

5. Pressure Transition Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the following: 1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Dresser, Inc.


3) EBAA Iron, Inc. 4) JCM Industries, Inc. 5) Romac Industries, Inc. 6) Smith-Blair, Inc.; a Sensus company. 7) The Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. 8) Viking Johnson.

b. Standard: AWWA C219. c. Description: Metal, sleeve-type same size as, with pressure rating at

least equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined. d. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. e. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. f. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

2.8 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.

B. Material: Linear low-density polyethylene film of 0.008-inch (0.20-mm) or high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film of 0.004-inch (0.10-mm) minimum thickness.

C. Form: Sheet.

D. Color: Black.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.


J. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

K. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

L. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

M. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

N. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.

O. Install steel piping according to applicable plumbing code.

P. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

Q. Install underground ABS and PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.

R. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:

1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Sovent Drainage System: Comply with ASSE 1043 and sovent fitting manufacturer's written installation instructions.

3. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

S. Install underground, copper, force-main tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

1. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.

T. Plumbing Specialties:


1. Install backwater valves in sanitary waster gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

3. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

U. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead-and-oakum calked joints.

C. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:



E. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder.

F. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe according to AWWA C606. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections, over gasket, with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.

G. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern.


H. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:


2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.

3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's. 2. In Drainage Piping: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings. 3. In Aboveground Force Main Piping: Fitting-type transition couplings. 4. In Underground Force Main Piping:

a. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type transition couplings. b. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Pressure transition couplings.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples. 3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric

flanges. 4. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.


A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

B. Shutoff Valves:

1. Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge. 2. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 3. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sewage pump discharge.

D. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow.

1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless otherwise indicated.

2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves unless drain has integral backwater valve.

3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 4. Comply with requirements for backwater valve specified in Division 22 Section

"Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.

2. Install stainless-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments.

3. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.

4. Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments.

5. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 6. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion

rolls. 7. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS

Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 8. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting, valve, and coupling.

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.

2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-

mm) rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8 (DN 150 and DN 200): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-

mm) rod. 5. Spacing for 10-foot (3-m) lengths may be increased to 10 feet (3 m). Spacing for

fittings is limited to 60 inches (1500 mm).

G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 3 (DN 80): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm)

rod. 7. NPS 6 and NPS 8 (DN 150 and DN 200): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm)

rod.


I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

J. Install hangers for stainless-steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50): 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3. NPS 4 (DN 100): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.

K. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch

(10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 4. NPS 3 and NPS 5 (DN 80 and DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 6. NPS 8 (DN 200): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.

L. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

M. Install supports for vertical ABS and PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).

N. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.

5. Install horizontal backwater valves with cleanout cover flush with floor. 6. Comply with requirements for backwater valves cleanouts and drains specified in

Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 7. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if

indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.

E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:


1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.


3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Exposed ABS and PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.

3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings CISPI heavy-duty hubless-piping

couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. 4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded nonpressure transition couplings.

C. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings CISPI heavy-duty hubless-piping

couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI heavy-duty hubless-piping

couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.

a. Option for Vent Piping, NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 and DN 90): Hard copper tube, Type M (Type C); copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.

4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

E. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI heavy-duty hubless-piping

couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition

couplings.

F. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the following:


1. Extra Heavy class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI heavy-duty cast-iron hubless-

piping couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Solid wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 4. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 5. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

G. Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 (DN 125) and larger shall be any of the following:

1. Extra Heavy Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI heavy-duty cast-iron hubless-

piping couplings; coupled joints. 3. Solid-wall PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. 4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

H. Grease waste piping

1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI heavy-duty cast-iron hubless-piping couplings; coupled joints.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements SANITARY WASTE PIPING AND SPECIALTIES March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 22 13 19 Page 1

SECTION 22 13 19

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:

1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains. 3. Roof flashing assemblies. 4. Through-penetration firestop assemblies. 5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 6. Flashing materials.


1. Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for trench drains for storm water, channel drainage systems for storm water, roof drains, and catch basins.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. FOG: Fats, oils, and greases.

C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

D. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

F. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

G. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. g. Josam Company; Blucher-Josam Div.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match

connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head brass-iron plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout

size. 7. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal.

B. Metal Floor Cleanouts:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Oatey. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule heavy-duty, adjustable housing cleanout.

3. Size: Same as connected branch. 4. Type: Cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule Heavy-duty, adjustable housing. 5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 6. Clamping Device: Required. 7. Outlet Connection: Spigot. 8. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket. 9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads. 10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy. 11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 12. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.


13. Riser: ASTM A 74, Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.

14. Standard: ASME A112.3.1. 15. Size: Same as connected branch. 16. Housing: Stainless steel. 17. Closure: Stainless steel with seal. 18. Riser: Stainless-steel drainage pipe fitting to cleanout.

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 4. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match

connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk brass plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout

size. 7. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with

screw. 8. Wall Access: Round nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-

installation frame and cover.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Commercial Enameling Co. b. Josam Company; Josam Div. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Prier Products, Inc. e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. g. Watts Drainage Products Inc. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

3. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. 4. Pattern: Floor drain. 5. Body Material: Gray iron. 6. Seepage Flange: Required. 7. Anchor Flange: Required. 8. Clamping Device: Required. 9. Outlet: Bottom. 10. Backwater Valve: Not required. 11. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Acid-resistant enamel.


12. Sediment Bucket: Not required. 13. Top or Strainer Material: Bronze. 14. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze. 15. Top Shape: Round. 16. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty. 17. Funnel: Not required. 18. Inlet Fitting: Gray iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and

trap-seal primer valve connection. 19. Trap Material: Cast iron.

2.3 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES

A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div. b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. c. Flashco.

B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch- (1.6-mm-) 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.

1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap. 2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap. 3. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.

2.4 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ProSet Systems Inc.

2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug. 3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack. 4. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral

nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with

neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug.

6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Open Drains:

1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping with increaser fitting of size indicated.

B. Deep-Seal Traps:


1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping. a. NPS 2 (DN 50): 4-inch- (100-mm-) minimum water seal. b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 5-inch- (125-mm-) minimum water seal.

C. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) side inlet.

D. Air-Gap Fittings:

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Inlet: Opening in top of body. 4. Outlet: Larger than inlet. 5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for

associated indirect waste piping.

E. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device that forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 2 inches (51 mm) above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.

2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

F. Stack Flashing Fittings:

1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

G. Vent Caps:

1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

H. Expansion Joints:

1. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M. 2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland. 3. End Connections: Matching connected piping. 4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.

2.6 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness.


2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft. (15-kg/sq. m), 0.0469-inch (1.2-mm) thickness. 3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness.

B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

C. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft. (3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm) thickness.

D. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft. (2.5 kg/sq. m or 0.27-mm) thickness.

E. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch (1.01-mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

F. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil (1.01-mm) minimum thickness.

G. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

H. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

I. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

J. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

2.7 MOTORS

A. General requirements for motors are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and

smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.


D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor

drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but

not less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression. b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1 percent

slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope,

but not greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression. 3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain

and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

G. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

H. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 2 inches (51 mm) above floor.

I. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

J. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

K. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.

L. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

M. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.

N. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance.

O. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.


B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.

2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches (250 mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.

G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.

3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:

1. Grease removal devices.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Tests and Inspections:


1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 01 00 Page 1

SECTION 23 01 00

BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Where contradiction occurs between this section and Division 1, the more stringent of the two shall apply.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Work includes:

1. Provision of labor, material, equipment and transportation required to complete the Work as shown on the drawings, specified herein and/or implied thereby.

B. Applicable provisions of General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and all sections in Division No. 1 “General Requirements” govern work under this section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. “Provide” means furnish and install referenced item with all appurtenances.

B. “Shall” indicates a mandatory requirement.

C. “Air Conditioning” is defined as the treatment and/or handling of any air to any degree by the systems shown on the drawings and herein specified and is not restricted to refrigerated cooling.

D. “Or Equal” is defined as approved as equal by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

A. Provide for the safety and good condition of all materials and equipment until final acceptance by the Owner. Protect all materials and equipment from damage from any cause whatever, and provide adequate and proper storage facilities during the progress of the work. Replace all damaged and defective work, material or equipment prior to filing application for final acceptance.

B. Cap or plug openings in equipment, piping, ducts and other systems to exclude entrance of dirt and other foreign material during construction.

C. Material storage shall be the contractor’s responsibility. Coordinate the storage of materials on site prior to purchasing of materials. Storage shall comply with Owner’s Authorized Representative’s requirements.

1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest adopted rules and regulations of the Nevada State Fire Marshall Division; the International Electrical Code (NEC); the Uniform Plumbing Code, 2012 edition; the Uniform Mechanical Code, 2012


edition; International Building Code, 2012 edition; and other applicable codes, laws or regulations of bodies lawfully empowered and having jurisdiction over this project. Nothing in the plans or specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. When codes conflict with one another, provide larger, higher or more restrictive standards without additional costs.

1.6 PERMITS

A. Obtain all permits, patent rights, and licenses that are required for the performing of this work by all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, or orders of any officer and/or body. Provide all notices necessary in connection therewith, and pay all fees relating thereto and all costs and expenses incurred on account thereof. No work shall be covered before inspection by the jurisdictional authorities and observation by the Architect.

1.7 PLANATION AND PRECEDENCE OF DRAWINGS

A. Drawings and specifications are intended to be read together so that any work mentioned in one and not the other shall be executed the same as if mentioned in both.

B. For purposes of clearness and legibility, drawings are essentially diagrammatic, and, although size and location of equipment are drawn to scale where possible, Contractor shall make use of all data in all the contract documents and shall verify this information at building site. At various locations, systems are drawn distorted for clarity.

C. Where the contract specifications and/or drawings are in conflict, obtain clarification of such during bidding. Clarification will only be given in written addendum form. Where addenda for clarification of such is not timely, base the bid on the higher standards or more restrictive requirements; prior to submission of product submittals, preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, obtain written clarification.

D. The drawings indicate required size and points of termination of piping and ductwork, and suggest proper routes to conform to structure avoid obstructions and preserve clearances. However, it is not intended that drawings indicate all necessary offsets, and it shall be the work of the Contractor to make the installation in such a manner as to conform to the structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear, without further instructions or cost to the Owner.

E. It is intended that all HVAC devices, piping, etc. be located symmetrically with all architectural elements. Refer to architectural, structural, electrical, plumbing plans and details in completing the required coordination. All system offsets, unless noted on drawings, shall be rectilinear. Offsets and transitions shall comply with best practices and applicable standards.

F. The Contractor shall fully inform himself regarding any and all peculiarities and limitations of the spaces available for the installation of all work and materials furnished and installed under the Contract. He shall exercise due and particular caution to determine that all parts of his work are made quickly and easily accessible.

G. Submittal of bid shall indicate the Contractor has examined the site, drawings and specifications and has included all required allowances in his bid. No allowances shall be made for any error resulting from Contractor’s failure to visit job site and to review drawings and specifications.


1.8 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Prepare coordination drawings at a scale not less than 1/8” equals 1’-0” for all areas of work. Submit and receive approval prior to commencing fabrication and/or installation. Major discrepancies from design documents shall be clearly identified.

B. These drawings shall be mutually prepared by all contractors. The sheet metal contractor shall initiate the drawing production. Each additional trade shall add their systems as required to complete full coordination. Each trade shall date and sign composite drawing.

C. If locations arise during construction where multiple disciplinary systems cannot fit in the space allocated as a result of one non-coordinate disciplinary system installation. The general contractor or the subcontractor who fails to coordinate shall be responsible for the system modifications required to make them fit.

D. Where conflicts arise during the completion of the coordination drawings, the general contractor shall determine resolution.

1.9 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Provide and maintain on the job one complete set of blueline prints of the drawings for the HVAC work. Carefully record on this set of prints, all work including ductwork, piping, valves, etc., which is installed differently from that indicated on the drawings; locate dimensionally from fixed points all buried piping including depths relative to finish floor elevations. Mark all changes of location of piping, ducts, and equipment in accordance with Division 1.

B. These drawings shall be continuously kept up-to-date, and shall be available for inspection at all times. Major discrepancies from approved shop drawings shall be clearly identified and resubmitted.

C. At completion of work, provide a neat and legible reproducible set of these up-to-date drawings which shall be individually signed and dated by the Contractor and the job inspector as to their accuracy.

D. Such drawings shall be submitted for acceptance and approval to the Owner’s Authorized Representative before final certificate of acceptance will be issued.

1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Perform all cutting and fitting required for work of this section in rough construction of the building.

B. All patching of finished construction of building shall be performed under the sections of specifications covering these materials by the trades at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. All cutting of concrete work by Contractor shall be by core drilling or concrete saw. Verify all connections to structure and cutting/core drilling sizes and locations with structural engineer prior to commencing work.

D. All patching of surfaces shall match adjacent material and finish.


1.11 DAMAGE BY LEAKS

A. Contractor shall be responsible for damage to the grounds, walks, roads, buildings, piping systems, electrical systems and their equipment and contents, caused by leaks in the piping system being installed or having been installed herein. He shall repair at his expense all damage so caused. All repair work shall be done as directed by the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

1.12 EMERGENCY REPAIRS

A. The Owner reserves the right to make emergency repairs as required to keep equipment in operation without voiding the Contractor’s guarantee bond nor relieving the Contractor of his responsibilities.

1.13 COORDINATION

A. The Contractor shall fully inform himself regarding any and all peculiarities and limitations of the spaces available for the installation of all work and materials furnished and installed under the contract. Coordinate with all other trades in advance of the work, requirements for openings, recesses and chases in the walls, partitions, equipment housekeeping pads, framing or openings and routing of piping, ductwork, conduit, etc. relative to each trade to alleviate conflicts. Should furnishing, requesting and coordinating this information be neglected, delayed or incorrect and additional work is found to be required, the cost of same shall be borne by the responsible Contractor.

B. This contractor shall coordinate at minimum the following:

1. All duct conduit and pipe openings with general contractor. 2. All equipment support locations (hung or floor mounted) with general contractor. 3. All fire smoke damper and powered equipment locations with the electrical and

fire alarm contractor.

1.14 SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to commencement of work and in accordance with the General Requirements, submit for review a list of all proposed equipment and material to be provided. By submitting the proposed equipment lists, it is deemed that the Contractor has performed the following: verified the delivery dates and such are compatible with the specified construction schedule; verified that the equipment is of proper size to accommodate the conditions specified or indicated. Where manufacturers without specific model numbers are named, such shall be regarded as acceptable as to the manufacturer only and not as to any specific equipment of the named manufacturer. Specific equipment of such name manufacturers shall comply with all requirements and shall be submitted for review. By proposing substitutions, it is deemed that the Contractor shall bear the cost of any construction or design changes necessary to accommodate the substitutions including but not limited to electrical, structural, architectural, plumbing modifications. Refer to Substitution Section in this section for additional requirements.

B. Provide formal submittal to Owner’s Authorized Representative. Review of the formal submittal is only for general conformance with design concept of project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. The Contractor is responsible for confirmation and correlation of the dimensions, quantities and sizes, for information that pertains to fabrication methods or construction techniques, and for coordination of work of all trades. Deviations from Drawings and Specifications shall be clearly and completely indicated by a separate letter in the formal submittals, and the lack of such is deemed complete compliance with Drawings and Specifications without any


deviations. Submittals favorably processed will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or deviations not so reported by a separate letter.

1. Products and equipment specified and/or scheduled on the drawings with manufacturers names and models identified, constitutes the basis of design, including but not limited to performance, acoustical characteristics, fir in allocated space, service and maintenance clearances, equipment replacement access space, and availability of reliable service at the project location and substitution of products and equipment specified and/or scheduled on the drawings with products or equipment of another manufacturer requires prior approval by Owners Authorized Representative in accordance with General Requirements.

2. Model numbers used may not indicate all features or options required for this specific installation. Modify the specified models to comply with all requirements, as specified and/or shown.

3. Product Data for Proposed Substitutions: a. Submit copies of complete data, with drawings and samples as

appropriate, including: 1) Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that

specified. 2) Changes required in other elements of the work because of the

substitution. 3) Affect on construction schedule. 4) Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the product

specified. 5) Availability of maintenance service and source of replacement

materials at the project location. 6) Any requests for equipment substitution shall include ¼” =1’-0”

scale layouts of proposed equipment in plan, elevations and sections complete with piping and ductwork hookups as applicable, to verify fit within allocated spaces, service and maintenance clearances and equipment replacement access spaces.

b. Acceptance of substitutions is entirely at the discretion of the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

C. All formal submittals shall be complete and with catalog data and information properly marked to show, among other things, equality of material (where substitution is allowed and desired), adequacy in capacity and performance to meet minimum capacities or performance as specified or indicated. Arrange the submittals in the same sequence as these Specifications.

D. Do not fabricate or deliver materials or equipment until formal submittals have been approved. Where material or equipment is used without such approval, it is deemed that the material or equipment shall be in complete compliance with drawings and specifications, without additional cost where such compliance is lacking.

E. Submittals shall be bound and shall include, as a minimum, the following:

1. Complete bill of materials listing equipment furnished and quantity of each component as applicable.

2. Catalog cut sheets of every component being provided with all items clearly highlighted.

3. Provide complete blueline shop drawings of the equipment detailing all field connection points.

4. Dimensions including weights and capacities. 5. Wiring diagrams showing control interface as applicable.


6. Warranty sheets. 7. Pressure drops as applicable. 8. Required clearances for maintenance.

F. Upon permission to proceed, after review of the formal submittal and prior to the installation of work, submit dimensional and scaled, not less than ¼” equal to one foot, coordination drawings of all ductwork and piping floor plans and mechanical equipment rooms and areas. Such layouts shall indicated but not necessary be limited to, all mechanical equipment, control panels, pipe risers, routes of major pipes, housekeeping pads, electrical stub-ups and points of connection, clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, proposed routing of larger equipment into and thru the building during construction and other like items. The layouts shall also indicate major equipment to be provided under other sections of work. Prepare floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections and details as required to indicate a coordinated effort has been addressed between all trades to alleviate problem areas due to limited space, sequencing of construction, etc. so as to not impede the efficient flow of work and account for unwarranted delays and costs.

1.15 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. If substitutions of controls or equipment requires any changes in the structural design and/or electrical work from that shown on the drawings, the extra cost of the equipment, added structural and/or electrical work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor requesting the substitution.

B. If the Contractor proposes substitutions of any equipment specified herein or on the drawings, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain approval for such equipment as well as approval for anchorage of such equipment from governing approval agencies. All costs required for such approval shall be the responsibility of the Contractor requesting the substitution.

C. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of an approved substitution, make such changes as may be required for the work to be completed and be made compatible with other systems in all respects.

1.16 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. When electrical work is specified in subsequent sections to be furnished and installed by the Mechanical Contractor, it shall be installed in strict and full accordance with the requirements of Division 26.

B. The power wiring, safety switches, combination controllers, (indicated on the electrical drawings), circuit breakers, ,motor-control equipment forming part of motor control centers or switchgear assemblies, and the electrical connections of the HVAC equipment to the electrical power source shall be provided under Division 26 (unless noted otherwise).

C. The electrical components of HVAC equipment including, but not limited to, motor controllers (starters), control or push-button stations, float/pressure switches, solenoid valves, thermostats, junction boxes and other devices functioning to control HVAC equipment shall be provided under Division 23. Interconnecting wiring for packaged equipment shall be provided as an integral part of the equipment.

D. Control Wiring: Line voltage wiring and conduit controlling HVAC equipment not shown on electrical drawings shall be provided under Division 23. All low voltage wiring required


for controlling HVAC equipment shall be provide under Division 23 (unless otherwise shown on Electrical Drawings). Installation of these items shall comply with Division 26.

1.17 SEISMIC RESTRAINT

A. This contractor shall submit stamped and signed documents by a professional structural engineer registered in the same state as the project certifying that all the associated systems meet the seismic requirements set forth in all the applicable codes associated with the project. This shall apply to all HVAC systems.

1.18 USE OF ENGINEERS DRAWINGS

A. HVAC Auto CADD drawings will be furnished by JBA at contractor’s request via Architect/Owner. Prior to furnishing such files. Contractor shall provide and sign a disclaimer noting the following:

1. JBA is not responsible for any use by the contractor of such drawings. 2. The contractor shall not use such drawings for any purposes other than the

associated project.

1.19 COMMISSIONING

A. Commissioning is a comprehensive and systematic process to verify that the building’s energy related systems are installed, calibrated and perform according to the owner’s project requirements, basis of design, and construction documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Products and materials shall be described in the pertinent section for Division 23 – HVAC.

B. Products and materials not specified within the specifications but specified on the drawings shall be as described on the drawings.

C. Materials and equipment: Wherever possible, all materials and/or equipment used for similar service shall be of the same manufacturer.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. All labor shall be carefully skilled for this kind of work and under the direction of a competent foreman (HVAC work).

B. All materials shall be new and in perfect condition.

C. Equipment shall bear the manufacturer’s label showing performance characteristics. Identifying size number shall be given only when it is not practicable or customary to show performance characteristics.

D. Equipment shall bear the label of a nationally recognized listing agency and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation requirements to maintain the listing.

E. All valves, pipe, fitting, etc., shall bear the manufacturer’s name or trademark.


F. Unless otherwise specified herein, all equipment and fixtures shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, including recommended service and removal or clearances.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTS

A. Contractor shall make all tests required by all legally constituted authorities and as follows:

1. All tests shall be made in the presence of the Owner’s Authorized Representative and a duly Authorized inspector. The Owner’s Authorized Representative shall be notified in writing five (5) working days before test are made.

2. Concealed work and insulated work shall remain uncovered until required testing has been performed and approved by the Owner’s Authorized Representative. If work required to be tested is covered before the approval of the Owner’s Authorized Representative has been obtained, it shall be uncovered for testing at the Contractor’s expense.

3. Obtain all required documents of certification indicating approval, acceptance and compliance with the requirements of all administrative authorities having jurisdiction over the work. No final payment shall be made until all such certificates are delivered to the Owner’s Authorized Representative.

4. Furnish labor, materials, instruments and bear other costs in connection with all test.

5. Testing and balancing of smoke control/life safety/fire alarm systems shall be in accordance with the latest adopted International Building Code Section 9 and local adopted amendments. Contractor shall make adjustments to systems, furnish testing equipment as necessary and appropriately coordinate work with the special inspector, Owners Representative, Engineer, Inspections and Fire Department. Contractor shall furnish qualified field personnel for smoke control/life safety/fire alarm testing procedures to verify proper operation and conformance with the requirements of the International Building Code Chapter 9 and local adopted amendments.

6. All piping, equipment and appurtenances shall be capable of operating within the given pressure and temperature characteristics of the project conditions. All piping systems, except as hereinafter specified, shall be given hydrodrastic (with water) test of at least 150% of the maximum operating pressure unless otherwise noted.

7. Before making test, remove or valve off from the system, gauges, traps, and other apparatus or equipment which may be damaged by test pressure.

8. Install a calibrated test pressure gauge in the system to observe any loss in pressure. Maintain the required test pressure for a sufficient length of time to enable an inspection to be made of all joints and connections. Perform tests after installation and prior to acceptance.

9. Final pressures at the end of the test period shall be no more or less than that caused by expansion or contraction of the test medium due to temperature changes.

10. After tests have been made and leaks repaired, clean and flush systems as hereinafter specified. Water piping shall be left under supply main pressure for the balance of the construction period.

3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP

A. Protection: Provide for the safety and good condition of all materials and equipment until final acceptance of the Owner’s Authorized Representative. Protect all materials and


equipment from damage from any cause whatever, and provide adequate and proper storage facilities during the progress of the work and replace all damaged and defective material, equipment or work prior to filing application for final acceptance. Equipment, piping and ductwork shall be stored at least six inches off the ground on blocking and kept clean. During construction properly cap all ducts, pipes and equipment and appurtenances to prevent the entrance of sand and dirt.

B. Cleaning

1. Thoroughly clean all piping, ductwork and all parts of the fixtures, apparatus and equipment. Clean all ductwork, piping apparatus and equipment that are to be insulated prior to installation of insulation. All parts shall be thoroughly cleaned of sand, dirt, cement, plaster, rust, and other materials, and all grease and oil spots removed. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out. All code stamps and nameplates shall be protected from damage and must be clean and legible before final inspection.

2. Exposed rough metal work shall be carefully brushed down with steel brushes to remove rust and other spots and left in clean condition to receive painter’s finish. Where factory prime coat has been damaged, this Contractor shall be responsible for restoration of same.

3. All piping shall be flushed out or blown out after pressure testing is complete and before being put into use. All strainer screens shall be removed and cleaned. After start-up and testing, strainer screens shall again be removed and cleaned.

3.3 STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. Provide all materials, equipment, supplies and labor necessary to construct all structural steel required for supporting piping, ductwork and equipment and miscellaneous steel work shown on the Drawings; as herein specified, or as may be required for installation of the HVAC system.

B. All miscellaneous structural steel for support of HVAC work is not shown on the Drawings. Whether structural steel is shown or not shown on the drawings, it shall be provided. The Contractor shall confirm all structural steel sized components which are shown on the drawings.

C. Structural steel shall be provided in the following locations

1. For all ceiling mounted fan coil units and cabinet heaters. 2. For all piping and ductwork mounted below a roof with metal deck construction. 3. For all piping and ductwork mounted under a floor with cellular metal deck

construction. 4. For all pipe supports for piping 8 inches in diameter and larger. 5. At the bottom of all pipe risers 6 inches in diameter and larger. 6. For all pipe anchors and pipe guides. 7. For all pipe racks. 8. For all pipe hangers which are not listed or shown in reputable pipe hanger

manufacturer catalogues or shown in the latest issue of MSS SP69.

D. All structural steel shall be designed to attach to the main building structure in such a manner as to not over stress this structure. Reinforcement of the building structure may be required in work areas located in existing buildings; reinforcement of the existing structure under the base contract will not be required unless specifically called for on the drawings. In areas where the Contractor has relocated ductwork, piping, and equipment to areas other than is shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall bear all costs of additional reinforcement which may be required.


D. Structural design shall be provided through the Contractor by a Civil or Structural Engineer who is registered in the State of Nevada.

E. Details of all structural steel shall be provided in shop drawing format. All structural steel shop drawings shall be stamped by the Contractor’s design Engineer prior to submittal. All attachments to building structure shall be approved by the project structural engineer prior to fabrication or installation.

F. The design, materials, fabrication and erection shall conform to “Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings” of the American Institute of Steel Construction, “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”, of the American Institute of Steel Construction, and also, when applicable, shall conform to the “Code for Welding Building Construction” of the American Welding Society.

G. The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting and patching fireproofing, as required, when connecting new miscellaneous steel to the building structure.

3.4 COMMISSIONING AND PRELIMINARY OPERATIONAL TEST

A. Prior to inspection to determine substantial completion, the Contractor shall put all HVAC systems into service and check that work required for that purpose has been done, including but not limited to the following condensed check list

1. Correct rotation of motors and ratings of overload heaters are verified. 2. Specified clean filters are installed and spares are on hand when specified. 3. All equipment has been started, checked, lubricated and adjusted in accordance

with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. All manufacturers certificates of start-up specified have been delivered to the

Owners Authorized Representative. 5. All equipment has been cleaned, and damaged painted finishes touched-up. 6. Damaged fins on heat exchangers have been combed out. Missing or damaged

parts have been replaced. 7. Flushing and chemical treatment of piping systems has been done and water

treatment equipment, where specified, is in operation. 8. Equipment labels, pipe marker labels, ceiling markers and valve tags are

installed. 9. Valve tag schedules, correct control diagrams, sequence of operation lists and

start-stop instructions have been posted. 10. Test and balance work is complete. 11. Maintenance manuals have been delivered and instructions to the Owners

operating personnel have been made. 12. Provide all instruments, equipment, labor and materials to complete the tests.

These tests may be required at any time between the installation of the work and the end of the warranty period. Should these tests expose any defective materials, poor workmanship or variance with requirements, make any changes necessary and remedy any defects at no cost to the Owner.

B. Prior to the inspection to determine substantial completion, the Contractor shall operate all HVAC systems as required to demonstrate that the installation and performance of these systems conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. Before handing over the system to Owner, replace temporary filters with complete new set of filters.

3.5 REVIEW OF CONTRACTOR’S TEST


A. All tests made by the Contractor or manufacturer’s representatives are subject to observation and review by the Owner’s Authorized Representative and Commissioning agent; the Contractor shall provide written notice five (5) days prior to testing. Testing shall be grouped and sequential as practical.

3.6 TEST LOGS

A. The contract shall maintain test logs listing the tests on all HVAC systems showing dates, items tested, inspector’s names, remarks on success or failure of the tests.

3.7 CLEANING UP AND REMOVAL OR SCRAP

A. For work under all HVAC sections, trash and scrap shall be cleaned up and removed from the site as the work progresses.

3.8 DAMAGE RESPONSIBILITY

A. The contractor shall be responsible for damage to the grounds, buildings or equipment, and the loss of refrigerants, fuels or gases, caused by leaks or breaks in pipes for equipment furnished or installed under this Division.

3.9 PRELIMINARY OPERATION

A. The Owner reserves the right to operate portions of the HVAC system on a preliminary basis without voiding the guarantee.

3.10 OPERATIONAL TEST

A. Before operational tests are performed, demonstrate that all systems and components are complete and fully charged with operating fluid and lubricants.

B. Systems shall be operable and capable of maintaining continuous uninterrupted operation during the operating and demonstration period. After all systems have been completely installed, connections made, and tests completed, operate the systems continuously for a period of five (5) working days during the hours of a normal working day.

C. Control systems shall be completely operable with settings properly calibrated and adjusted.

D. Rotating equipment shall be in dynamic balance and alignment.

E. If the system fails to operate continuously during the test period, the deficiencies shall be corrected and the entire test repeated.

3.11 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS, ETC.

A. General: Thoroughly instruct the Owner’s operators in every detail of operation of the system. Provide the Owner with a list of all equipment, giving the manufacturer’s name, model number, serial number, parts list and complete internal wiring diagrams. All directions for operation furnished by the manufacturer shall be carefully saved and turned over to the Owner, together with written sequence of operation, operating and maintenance instructions for each system and its equipment. Coordinate scheduling of instruction times with Owner’s operators.


B. Specific Data: Provide complete sets of documentation in accordance with Division 1 requirements. Where quantities are not clearly defined in Division 1, submit four (4) complete sets. The following data shall be submitted to the Owner for approval prior to acceptance of the installation, complete and at one time; (partial or separate data will not be accepted) data shall consist of the following:

1. Valve Directory: Indicating valve number, location, function and normal operating position for each.

2. Piping identification schedule. 3. Equipment: List of nameplates, including nameplate data. 4. Manufacturer’s Literature: Copies of manufacturer’s instructions for operation

and maintenance of all mechanical equipment, including replacement parts lists and drawings. Mark or highlight brochure literature indicating the models, sizes, capacities, curve operating points, etc., in a manner to clearly indicate the equipment in-stalled. Remove all pages or sheets from the bulletin and catalogs that do not pertain to equipment installed on the project.

5. Written Instructions: Typewritten instructions for operation and maintenance of the system composed or OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS, MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE. a. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS shall contain a brief description of the

system. Adjustments requiring the technical knowledge of the service agency personnel shall not be included in the operating instructions. The fact such adjustments are required, however, shall be noted.

b. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS shall list each item of equipment requiring inspection, lubrication or service and describe the performance of such maintenance.

c. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE shall list each item of equipment requiring maintenance, shall show the exact type of bearing on every component of each item of equipment, and shall show when each item of equipment should be inspected or serviced.

6. Instructions: Operating personnel shall be instructed in the operation of the system in accordance with typewritten, approved instructions.

7. Letters of certification as required under other sections. 8. A CD or similar electronic storages media including original PDF files for each of

the above shall be included with each copy. Furnish a dedicated index of the electronic media contents identifying the file name associated with each document.

C. Binders: Assemble sets of the above data in loose-leaf ring-type binders with permanent covers, with identification on front and on spine. Provide appropriate sleeve for electronic media.

D. The above shall in no way preclude the requirements of other sections of these specifications – and is to be supplemental to other paragraphs on this subject found in this section and other sections.

3.12 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. During the guarantee period and as directed by the Owner, make any additional tests, adjustment, etc., that may be required and correct any defects or deficiencies arising from operation of the systems. Operational tests shall be made during both heating and cooling seasons and on all systems.

B. Guards: Furnish and install removable guards around all moving parts of all equipment and/or apparatus. Guards shall be securely anchored to floor or equipment, and shall


provide protection at ends and sides to prevent contract with sheaves, belts, couplings, etc. Holes in suitable locations shall be provided for measuring speeds.

C. Completion:

1. When the installation is complete and adjustments specified herein have been made, the system shall be operated for a period of one week, during which time it shall be demonstrated to the Owner’s Authorized Representative as being completed and operating in conformance with these specifications. The Contractor shall schedule all work so that this time period, which is to confirm a “bug-free” system, will occur be-fore the total project is accepted for substantial completion by Owner.

2. The work hereunder shall not be reviewed for final acceptance until operating and maintenance data, manufacturer’s literature, valve directories, piping identification code directory, and nameplates specified herein have been approved and properly posted in the building.

3.13 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY

A. Guarantees and warranties shall be as defined in Division 1 Sections.

B. All materials, apparatus and equipment furnished and installed under the HVAC division of these specifications, shall be new and fee from any defects. Should any problems develop within one year from date of acceptance of the work, due to inferior or faulty materials and/or workmanship, the problems shall be corrected by this Contractor without expense to the Owner. Any defective materials or inferior workmanship noticed at the time of installation or during the guarantee period shall be corrected immediately to the entire satisfaction of the Owner.

C. The work shall be installed of such materials and in such a manner that:

1. All apparatus or equipment shall operate in accordance with detailed specifications covering each item.

2. Contractor shall guarantee that his installation of all materials and equipment will meet the performance requirements of these specifications and that all equipment will deliver the specified or required capacities.

3. The Owner reserves the right to make temporary or emergency repairs as necessary to keep equipment in operating condition without voiding the guarantee contained herein nor relieving the Contractor of his responsibilities during the guarantee period.

4. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to any part of the premises caused by leaks or break in pipe lines, fixtures or equipment furnished and installed under his contract for a period of one year after date of acceptance of the project by Owner. He shall replace in kind, at his own expense, any and all items so damaged to the complete satisfaction of the Owner.

5. The above shall be supplemental to and in no way preclude the requirements of other sections of these specifications

6. After operation of any liquid system and if any piping, coils or other components be-come air bound, this contractor shall make all necessary system modifications including but not limited to repiping (as approved), installation or air vents or fittings at no extra cost to the Owner.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 05 00 Page 1

SECTION 23 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. HVAC demolition. 9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 10. Painting and finishing. 11. Concrete bases. 12. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 2. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.


2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."



C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Contractor shall coordinate prior to purchasing equipment. Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified at Contractor’s expense. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support a minimum of 4” above grade and provide support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.


2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.


A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze


flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise

indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.


A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.


C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.


A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

1. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Nipples: Brass nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 2. Pressure Plates: Stainless Steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure

plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.7 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.


G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw and chrome-plated finish.

F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw and chrome-plated finish.

G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.9 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. Contractor shall be responsible for system performance deficiencies due to contractor deviations from contract documents.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.


D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve access and servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes. Install piping at code required slopes where not indicated.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: (Verify escutcheon types with Architect in front of house space)

1. New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-

pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished

chrome-plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-

piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-

piece, stamped-steel type. f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. g. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished chrome-plated finish. h. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. i. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with

set screw. j. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece,

floor-plate type.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment

areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend


cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-

board partitions. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane

waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing. 1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, fire rating and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing

elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION










G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.


I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:


2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC

socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:


1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.5 PAINTING OF PIPING AND SUPPORTS

A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

C. Paint the surface of ducts visible through supply, return, exhaust or transfer openings flat black.

D. Paint all bare piping, hangers, supports, etc., exposed to weather with paint intended for outdoor use and high resistance to ultra violet deterioration. Colors as selected by Architect.

E. Surface preparation, priming, finish coars application, etc., shall be in accordance with painting section of these specifications.

3.6 SUPPORTS, EQUIPMENT PADS, STAGING, ETC.

A. Construct all supports required for the proper installation of equipment in accordance with the drawings and if not indicated on drawings. Refer to architectural and structural drawings for equipment pads by others. Provide all staging, scaffolds, platforms, ladders or similar facilities required to properly install the work.

3.7 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic restraint requirements.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.


2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.



6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as

specified in Division 03

3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.9 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

D. Prior to installation of any wood supports, Contractor shall verify building code compliance requirements.

3.10 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.


3.11 DRIVES

A. The Contractor shall allow for each belt driven unit furnished by him a minimum of two drive changes including sheaves/pulleys, belts, etc.

B. Changes shall be as directed by the Owners Authorized Representative and may be required where conditions warrant an increase/decrease in airflow delivery.

3.12 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

A. Access Doors and Panels

1. Wherever volume dampers, fire dampers, smoke dampers, combination fire/smoke dampers, controls, valves or other items or parts of the installation which require periodic inspection or adjustments are concealed by permanent non-removable construction, an access door or panel shall be provided. Volume dampers utilizing remote actuation do not require access panels. Doors or panels shall be as manufactured by Milcor, Ruskin or approved equal wit slotted head cam locks. Rating of access door or panel shall be determined by rating of wall or ceiling which door or panel is installed. Types to be as approved and as appropriate for the surface and construction in which it is installed. Furnishing and locating by this Contractor; installation by other Division; verify all locations with Architect. Submit drawings indicating all access door or panel locations.

2. Doors or panels shall be a minimum of 24”x24” in ceilings.

3.13 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. See Division 2 for additional excavation and backfill requirements.

B. Underground piping shall be installed with a minimum of 24” cover from finish grade or as noted on drawings.

C. Excavation for pipes shall be cut a minimum of 6” below the required grade. A 6” bed of sand or other approved material shall then be placed and properly compacted to provide an accurate grade and uniform bearing throughout the length of the pipe.

D. Backfill of pipes shall include a 6” layer of sand or other approved material over top of the pipe(s), properly compacted. Balance of backfill material and all compaction shall be in compliance with Division 2.

E. Sand used shall be certified to a resistance of not less than the surrounding soil when wet with distilled water and shall consist of clean, natural, washed sand with particles of size which will pass through a 3/8” screen, 90% will pass through a ¼” screen and 25% will pass through a No. 50 screen.

F. Backfilling shall not be placed until the work has been inspected, tested and approved.

G. Clods or lumps 2” in size or larger shall not be permitted in the backfill. If the excavated material is not suitable, adequate material shall be provided by hailing from other locations.

H. Surplus earth or material remaining after backfilling shall be removed from the site as indicated in Division 2.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 05 13 Page 1

SECTION 23 05 13

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors and variable frequency drives for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, variable frequency drives, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium efficiency as defined in NEMA MG 1.


C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Drives: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish,

designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally

protected motors.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.


C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 05 14 Page 1

SECTION 23 05 14

VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS (DRIVES)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes solid-state, PWM, VFCs for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors.

B. Refer to Variable Frequency Drive Schedule for requirements, in addition to items listed in this section.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for monitoring and control of motor circuits.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BMS: Building management system.

B. IGBT: Integrated gate bipolar transistor.

C. LAN: Local area network.

D. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.

E. PWM: Pulse-width modulated.

F. VFC: Variable frequency controller (drive).


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 100 miles (160 km) of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.


C. Source Limitations: Obtain VFCs of a single type through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs, minimum clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions and clearances.


A. Deliver VFCs in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path as indicated.

B. Store VFCs indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect VFCs from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

C. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover VFCs to protect them from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers; install electric heating of sufficient wattage to prevent condensation.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full load without derating, under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40 deg C. 2. Humidity: Less than 90 percent (noncondensing). 3. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet (1005 m).

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of VFCs with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal and Moisture Protection."

D. Coordinate features of VFCs, installed units, and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect.

E. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each VFC and each installed unit with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor and load.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Danfoss Inc.; Danfoss Electronic Drives Div. 2. ABB 3. Toshiba

2.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS

A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFC; listed and labeled as a complete unit and arranged to provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3-phase induction motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency.

1. Provide unit suitable for operation of premium-efficiency motor as defined by NEMA MG 1.

B. Design and Rating: Match load type such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.

C. Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range.

D. Unit Operating Requirements:

1. Input ac voltage tolerance of 208 V, plus or minus 5, 380 to 500 V, plus or minus 10 percent.

2. Input frequency tolerance of 50/60 Hz, plus or minus 6 percent. 3. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load. 4. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent. 5. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; 2.0 times

the base load current for 3 seconds. 6. Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque or as indicated. 7. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent.

E. Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an 11:1 speed range.

1. Electrical Signal: 4 to 20 mA at 24 V.

F. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. 2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. 3. Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds. 4. Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds. 5. Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating.

G. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors. 2. Under- and overvoltage trips; inverter overtemperature, overload, and

overcurrent trips.


3. Motor Overload Relay: Adjustable and capable of NEMA ICS 2, Class 10, 20, 30 performance (field selectable).

4. Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load combination at a natural frequency of the combination.

5. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. 6. Loss-of-phase protection. 7. Reverse-phase protection. 8. Short-circuit protection. 9. Motor overtemperature fault.

H. Multiple-Motor Capability: Controller suitable for service to multiple motors and having a separate overload relay and protection for each controlled motor. Overload relay shall shut off controller and motors served by it when overload relay is tripped.

I. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempts three restarts after controller fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction. Bidirectional autospeed search shall be capable of starting into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without damage to controller, motor, or load.

J. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped.

K. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.

L. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.

M. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators shall indicate the following conditions:

1. Power on. 2. Run. 3. Overvoltage. 4. Line fault. 5. Overcurrent. 6. External fault.

N. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches with manual speed control potentiometer and elapsed time meter.

O. Indicating Devices: Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in controller door and connected to indicate the following controller parameters:

1. Output frequency (Hz). 2. Motor speed (rpm). 3. Motor status (running, stop, fault). 4. Motor current (amperes). 5. Motor torque (percent). 6. Fault or alarming status (code). 7. PID feedback signal (percent). 8. DC-link voltage (VDC). 9. Set-point frequency (Hz). 10. Motor output voltage (V).

P. Control Signal Interface:


1. Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of 2 analog inputs (0 to 10 V or 0/4-20 mA) and 6 programmable digital inputs.

2. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from the BMS or other control systems: a. 0 to 10-V dc. b. 0-20 or 4-20 mA. c. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs. d. RS485. e. Keypad display for local hand operation.

3. Output Signal Interface: a. A minimum of 1 analog output signal (0/4-20 mA), which can be

programmed to any of the following: 1) Output frequency (Hz). 2) Output current (load). 3) DC-link voltage (VDC). 4) Motor torque (percent). 5) Motor speed (rpm). 6) Set-point frequency (Hz).

4. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of 2 dry circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:

1) Motor running. 2) Set-point speed reached. 3) Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent). 4) PID high- or low-speed limits reached.

Q. Communications: Provide an RS485 interface allowing VFC to be used with an external system within a multidrop LAN configuration. Interface shall allow all parameter settings of VFC to be programmed via BMS control. Provide capability for VFC to retain these settings within the nonvolatile memory. Communication shall be BACnet/ASTP.

R. Integral Disconnecting Means: NEMA AB 1, molded-case switch with lockable handle.

S. Remote Indicating Circuit Terminals: Mode selection, controller status, and controller fault.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type.

C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position with control circuit open.

D. Standard Displays:

1. Output frequency (Hz). 2. Set-point frequency (Hz). 3. Motor current (amperes). 4. DC-link voltage (VDC). 5. Motor torque (percent). 6. Motor speed (rpm). 7. Motor output voltage (V).


E. Current-Sensing, Phase-Failure Relays for Bypass Controller: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connection; arranged to operate on phase failure, phase reversal, current unbalance of from 30 to 40 percent, or loss of supply voltage; with adjustable response delay.


A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested VFCs before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VFC installation.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Select features of each VFC to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; and duty cycle of motor, controller, and load.

B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Anchor each VFC assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and grout sills flush with mounting surface.

B. Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Fuses."

C. If VFD’s are to be mounted in rooftop units, proper ventilation shall be provided with ducted air from the cold deck in multi-zone units.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFC units.

3.5 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.


C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in hand position.

2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both hand and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 26 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following:

1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of solid-state controllers.

3. Report results in writing.

C. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

D. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

E. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection, except optional tests, stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain variable frequency controllers.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 05 16 Page 1

SECTION 23 05 16

EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Expansion-compensator packless expansion joints. 2. Flexible-hose packless expansion joints. 3. Metal-bellows packless expansion joints. 4. Rubber packless expansion joints. 5. Grooved-joint expansion joints. 6. Pipe loops and swing connections. 7. Alignment guides and anchors.


A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures.

B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Metal, Expansion-Compensator Packless Expansion Joints:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Flexicraft Industries. b. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. c. Metraflex, Inc. d. Senior Flexonics Pathway. e. Unaflex.

2. Minimum Pressure Rating: As required to match pipe system installed within. 3. Configuration for Copper Tubing: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows with copper

pipe ends. a. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint or

threaded.


b. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Threaded. 4. Configuration for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows; steel-pipe end

connections; and carbon-steel shroud. a. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. b. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or Weld.

B. Flexible-Hose Packless Expansion Joints:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. b. Flexicraft Industries. c. Metraflex, Inc.

2. Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two flexible-metal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section of flexible hose.

3. Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths. 4. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Copper-alloy fittings

with end connections to match piping installed within. a. Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F

and 340 psig at 450 deg F ratings. 5. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Copper-alloy fittings

with end connections to match piping installed within. a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 300

psig at 70 deg F and 225 psig at 450 deg F ratings. 6. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Carbon-steel fittings with

threaded end connections. a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 450

psig at 70 deg F and 325 psig at 600 deg F ratings. 7. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Carbon-steel fittings with

end connections to match piping installed within. a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 200

psig at 70 deg F and 145 psig at 600 deg F ratings.

C. Metal-Bellows Packless Expansion Joints:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Adsco Manufacturing LLC. b. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. c. Flexicraft Industries. d. Flex Pression Ltd. e. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. f. Metraflex, Inc.

2. Standards: ASTM F 1120 and EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc."

3. Type: Circular, corrugated bellows with external tie rods. 4. Minimum Pressure Rating: A required to match piping system installed within 5. Configuration: Double joint with base class(es) unless otherwise indicated. 6. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing: Multi-ply phosphor-bronze bellows, copper

pipe ends, and brass shrouds. 7. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Multi-ply stainless-steel bellows, steel pipe

ends, and carbon-steel shroud.

2.2 GROOVED-JOINT EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:


1. Anvil International, Inc. 2. Shurjoint Piping Products. 3. Victaulic Company.

B. Description: Factory-assembled expansion joint made of several grooved-end pipe nipples, couplings, and grooved joints.

C. Standard: AWWA C606, for grooved joints.

D. Nipples: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, steel pipe with grooved ends.

E. Couplings: Flexible type for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gaskets, and bolts and nuts.

2.3 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS

A. Alignment Guides:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. b. Flexicraft Industries. c. Flex-Weld, Inc. d. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. e. Metraflex, Inc.

2. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.

B. Anchor Materials:

1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head. 3. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. 4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for

use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel. b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel. c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

5. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud, bonding-system anchor for use with hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. a. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-

component epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed.

b. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud unless otherwise indicated.

c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION

A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed.


B. Install metal-bellows expansion joints according to EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc."

C. Install grooved-joint expansion joints to grooved-end steel piping

3.2 PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.

B. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings including tee in main.

C. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including tee in riser.

D. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including tee in main.

3.3 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

B. Install guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest to expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint.

C. Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure.

D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

E. Anchor Attachments:

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

2. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69, Type 24, U-bolts bolted to anchor.

F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding. 2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow

fastener manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 05 19 Page 1

SECTION 23 05 19

METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 2. Thermowells. 3. Dial-type pressure gages. 4. Gage attachments. 5. Test plugs. 6. Test-plug kits. 7. Sight flow indicators. 8. Orifice flowmeters. 9. Pitot-tube flowmeters. 10. Turbine flowmeters. 11. Venturi flowmeters.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Trerice. b. Weiss Instruments, Inc. c. Winters Instruments - U.S. d. Palmer.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Cast aluminum; 9-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle with locking device. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings graduated in deg F. 7. Window: Glass or plastic. 8. Stem: Aluminum, brass or stainless steel and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud. b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a

maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range.


2.2 DUCT-THERMOMETER MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Description: Flanged bracket with screw holes, for attachment to air duct and made to hold thermometer stem.

2.3 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee

fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES or CSA. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: ASME B1.1 screw threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.4 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: a. Trerice. b. Watts Regulator Co. c. Weiss Instruments, Inc. d. Palmer.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Sealed type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal

diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe

threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated

in psi. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass or plastic. 10. Ring: Stainless steel. 11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.5 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of brass or stainless-steel pipe with NPS 1/4 pipe threads.


C. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.6 TEST PLUGS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following:

1. Trerice. 2. Watts Regulator Co. 3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

F. Core Inserts: EPDM self-sealing rubber.

2.7 FLOWMETERS

A. Orifice Flowmeters:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: a. ABB. b. Bell & Gossett. c. Armstrong.

2. Description: Flowmeter with sensor, hoses or tubing, fittings, valves, indicator, and conversion chart.

3. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or system served.

4. Sensor: Wafer-orifice-type, calibrated, flow-measuring element; for installation between pipe flanges. a. Design: Differential-pressure-type measurement for gas, or water. b. Construction: Cast-iron body, brass valves with integral check valves

and caps, and calibrated nameplate. c. Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig. d. Minimum Temperature Rating: 250 deg F e. Retain one of first two subparagraphs below.

5. Permanent Indicators: Meter suitable for wall or bracket mounting, calibrated for connected sensor and having 6-inch- diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper tubing for connecting to sensor. a. Scale: Gallons per minute. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent between 20 and 80 percent of scale

range. 6. Portable Indicators: Hand-held, differential-pressure type, calibrated for

connected sensor and having two 12-foot hoses, with carrying case. a. Scale: Gallons per minute. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent between 20 and 80 percent of scale

range. 7. Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in gallons. 8. Conversion Chart: Flow rate data compatible with sensor and indicator.


9. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter.

B. Pitot-Tube Flowmeters:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: a. ABB. b. Emerson. c. TACO Incorporated. d. Veris Industries, Inc.

2. Description: Flowmeter with sensor and indicator. 3. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or

system served. 4. Sensor: Insertion type; for inserting probe into piping and measuring flow directly

in gallons per minute. a. Design: Differential-pressure-type measurement for water. b. Construction: Stainless-steel probe of length to span inside of pipe, with

integral transmitter and direct-reading scale. c. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig. d. Minimum Temperature Rating: 250 deg F.

5. Indicator: Hand-held meter; either an integral part of sensor or a separate meter. 6. Integral Transformer: For low-voltage power connection. 7. Accuracy: Plus or minus 3 percent. 8. Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in gallons. 9. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter.

C. Turbine Flowmeters:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: a. ABB. b. ONICON Incorporated. c. Seimans.

2. Description: Flowmeter with sensor and indicator. 3. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or

system served. 4. Sensor: Impeller turbine; for inserting into pipe fitting or for installing in piping

and measuring flow directly in gallons per minute. a. Design: Device or pipe fitting with inline turbine and integral direct-

reading scale for gas, or water. b. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with plastic turbine or

impeller. c. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig d. Minimum Temperature Rating: 200 deg F.

5. Indicator: Hand-held meter; either an integral part of sensor or a separate meter. 6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1-1/2 percent. 7. Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in gallons. 8. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter.

D. Venturi Flowmeters:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: a. ABB. b. Armstrong. c. Sierra Instruments. d. Siemens.


2. Description: Flowmeter with calibrated flow-measuring element, hoses or tubing, fittings, valves, indicator, and conversion chart.

3. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or system served.

4. Sensor: Venturi-type, calibrated, flow-measuring element; for installation in piping. a. Design: Differential-pressure-type measurement for gas, or water. b. Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel, with brass fittings

and attached tag with flow conversion data. c. Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig. d. Minimum Temperature Rating: 250 deg F. e. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. f. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged or welded. g. Flow Range: Flow-measuring element and flowmeter shall cover

operating range of equipment or system served. 5. Permanent Indicators: Meter suitable for wall or bracket mounting, calibrated for

connected flowmeter element, and having 6-inch-diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper tubing for connecting to flowmeter element. a. Scale: Gallons per minute. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent between 20 and 80 percent of scale

range. 6. Portable Indicators: Hand-held, differential-pressure type, calibrated for

connected flowmeter element and having two 12-foot hoses, with carrying case. a. Scale: Gallons per minute. b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent between 20 and 80 percent of scale

range. 7. Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in gallons. 8. Conversion Chart: Flow rate data compatible with sensor. 9. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws.

G. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

H. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).

I. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam.


J. Install test plugs in piping tees.

K. Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing.

L. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems.

N. Install wafer-orifice flowmeter elements between pipe flanges.

O. Install differential-pressure-type flowmeter elements, with at least minimum straight lengths of pipe, upstream and downstream from element according to manufacturer's written instructions.

P. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.

Q. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.

R. Mount thermal-energy meters on wall if accessible; if not, provide brackets to support meters.

S. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. 2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler. 3. Two inlets and two outlets of each chiller. 4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units. 5. Two inlets and two outlets of each hydronic heat exchanger. 6. Inlet and outlet of each thermal-storage tank. 7. Outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts. 8. Elsewhere as indicated in the contract documents.

T. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. 2. Inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and condenser-water connection. 3. Suction and discharge of each pump. 4. Elsewhere as indicated in the contract documents.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

B. Connect flowmeter-system elements to meters.

C. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.

D. Connect thermal-energy meter transmitters to meters.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.


3.4 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Condenser-Water Piping: 0 to 150 deg F.

C. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 20 to 240 deg F.

D. Scale Range for Steam and Steam-Condensate Piping: 50 to 400 deg F.

E. Scale Range for Air Ducts: 0 to 150 deg F.

F. Insert additional paragraphs for thermometer scale ranges and applications here.

3.5 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi.

B. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 300 psi.

C. Scale Range for Condenser-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

D. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

E. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi.

F. Retain one or more of seven paragraphs below. If retaining more than one scale range, indicate location of each on Drawings.

G. Scale Range for Steam Piping: 30 in. Hg to 15 psi.

H. Scale Range for Steam Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

I. Scale Range for Steam Piping: 0 to 200 psi.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 05 23 Page 1

SECTION 23 05 23

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze ball valves. 2. Iron ball valves. 3. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves. 4. Iron, grooved-end butterfly valves. 5. High-performance butterfly valves. 6. Bronze swing check valves. 7. Iron swing check valves. 8. Iron, plate-type check valves. 9. Bronze gate valves. 10. Iron gate valves. 11. Bronze globe valves. 12. Lubricated plug valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.



A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature.

If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger. 2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller. 4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for

every 5 plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head. 5. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator;

of size and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Gate Valves: With rising stem. 2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material,

and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. 3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.


4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:

1. Manufacturers: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full.

2.3 IRON BALL VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Ball Valves:

1. Manufacturers: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. c. Kitz Corporation. d. Sure Flow Equipment Inc. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-72. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Split body. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Seats: PTFE or TFE. g. Stem: Stainless steel. h. Ball: Stainless steel. i. Port: Full.

2.4 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 150 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:

1. Manufacturers: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. b. Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corp. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.


d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. Hammond Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Red-White Valve Corporation. i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 150 psig. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at

rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Aluminum bronze.

B. 150 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Ductile-Iron Disc:

1. Manufacturers: a. Bray Controls; a division of Bray International. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Center Line. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. DeZurik Water Controls. f. Hammond Valve. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.


rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Nickel-plated ductile iron.

C. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc:

1. Manufacturers: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. c. DeZurik Water Controls. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Red-White Valve Corporation. h. Sure Flow Equipment Inc. i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.


rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM.


f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Stainless steel.

2.5 IRON, GROOVED-END BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 175 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves:

1. Manufacturers: a. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. b. Shurjoint Piping Products. c. Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products. d. Victaulic Company. e. NIBCO INC.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 175 psig. c. Body Material: Coated, ductile iron. d. Stem: Two-piece stainless steel. e. Disc: Coated, ductile iron. f. Seal: EPDM.

B. 300 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves:

1. Manufacturers: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. c. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation. d. NIBCO INC. e. Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products. f. Victaulic Company.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. NPS 8 (DN 50) and Smaller CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. NPS 10 (DN 250) and Larger CWP Rating: 200 psig. d. Body Material: Coated, ductile iron. e. Stem: Two-piece stainless steel. f. Disc: Coated, ductile iron. g. Seal: EPDM.

2.6 HIGH-PERFORMANCE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Class 150, Single-Flange, High-Performance Butterfly Valves:

1. Manufacturers: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-68. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig at 125 deg F. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at

rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: Carbon steel. e. Seat: Reinforced PTFE or metal. f. Stem: Stainless steel.


g. Disc: Stainless steel.

B. Class 300, Single-Flange, High-Performance Butterfly Valves:

1. Manufacturers: a. NIBCO INC.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-68. b. CWP Rating: 600 psig at 125 deg F and 250 psig at 210 deg F. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at

rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: Carbon steel. e. Seat: PTFE. f. Stem: Stainless steel. g. Disc: Stainless steel.

2.7 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Manufacturers: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. Kitz Corporation. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.

2.8 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:

1. Manufacturers: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Hammond Valve. e. Kitz Corporation. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze.


g. Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.9 IRON, PLATE-TYPE CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron, Dual-Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat:

1. Manufacturers: a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. NIBCO INC. e. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: API 594. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Wafer, spring-loaded plates. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. e. Seat: EPDM

2.10 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:

1. Manufacturers: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. Hammond Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Red-White Valve Corporation. i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in

bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

2.11 IRON GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:

1. Manufacturers: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Hammond Valve. e. Kitz Corporation. f. Milwaukee Valve Company.


g. NIBCO INC. h. Red-White Valve Corporation. i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

B. Class 250, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. c. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 500 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.12 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Manufacturers: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. c. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in

bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem and Disc: Bronze. f. Packing: Asbestos free. g. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

2.13 IRON GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Globe Valves:

1. Manufacturers:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Hammond Valve. e. Kitz Corporation. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Red-White Valve Corporation. i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-85, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

B. Class 250, Iron Globe Valves:

1. Manufacturers: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-85, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 500 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.



A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Plate-Type Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. 3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Manual Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly valves. 2. Manual Balancing Valves: Ball, butterfly. 3. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type. 4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Compact water, plate type check valves with

resilient-seat check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded

valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

3.5 CHILLED-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with stainless-steel trim.


3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc. 4. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS, bronze. 5. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, ductile-iron disc.

2. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 175 CWP. 3. High-Performance Butterfly Valves: single flange. 4. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats. 5. Iron, Plate-Type Check Valves: Class 125; dual plate; resilient seat.

3.6 CONDENSER-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with stainless-steel trim. 3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc. 4. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, RS. 5. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc.


1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.

2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, aluminum-bronze disc.

3. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 175 CWP. 4. High-Performance Butterfly Valves: single flange. 5. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats. 6. Iron, Plate-Type Check Valves: Class 125; dual plate; resilient seat.

3.7 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with stainless-steel trim. 3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc. 4. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, RS. 5. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc.


1. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, ductile-iron disc.

2. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 175 CWP. 3. High-Performance Butterfly Valves: Class 150, single flange. 4. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats. 5. Iron, Plate-Type Check Valves: Class 125; dual plate; resilient seat.


3.8 CONTROL VALVES (COORDINATE WITH SECTION 23 09 00)

A. Air Handling Units to be provided with energy valves with integral BTU meter capabilities and data connection for Facilities interface.

B. Variable Air Volume Boxes to be provided with pressure independent characterized control valves.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 Page 1

SECTION 23 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Pipe stands. 7. Equipment supports.


1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Division 23 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for pipe guides and anchors.

3. Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.

4. Division 23 Section(s) Metal Ducts for duct hangers and supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.



A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

B. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

C. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

D. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping.

E. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

1. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

2. Standard: MFMA-4. 3. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips. 4. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into

channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 6. Metallic Coating: Electroplated zinc

2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psig ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.


E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.6 PIPE STANDS

A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support piping.

B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Base: Plastic. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel,

continuous-thread rods. 4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or

stainless-steel, roller-type pipe support.

E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Bases: One or more; plastic. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels. 4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel. 5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.

F. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from structural-steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.


A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.


B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs.

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.


J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

N. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project

through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger

shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building

services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier

is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel

weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel

weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.


C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and

so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING


1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

G. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

H. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 10.


2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F pipes NPS 4 to NPS 10, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 10, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 10 if little or no insulation is required.

5. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.

6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 10, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 10, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

8. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 10, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

I. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 10.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 10 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

J. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various

types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping

installations.

K. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required

tangent to flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.


9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is

required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to

linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

L. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

M. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze

member.

N. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.


O. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 05 33 Page 1

SECTION 23 05 33

HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes heat tracing with self-regulating, parallel resistance electric heating cables.



1.4 SYSTEMS REQUIRING HEAT TRACE

A. Water piping (as indicated on drawings).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SELF-REGULATING, PARALLEL-RESISTANCE HEATING CABLES


1. Chromalox, Inc.; Wiegard Industrial Division; Emerson Electric Company. 2. Raychem; a division of Tyco Thermal Controls. 3. Thermon Manufacturing Co.

B. Heating Element: Pair of parallel No. 16AWG, nickel-coated stranded copper bus wires embedded in crosslinked conductive polymer core, which varies heat output in response to temperature along its length. Terminate with waterproof, factory-assembled nonheating leads with connectors at one end, and seal the opposite end watertight. Cable shall be capable of crossing over itself once without overheating.

C. Electrical Insulating Jacket: Flame-retardant polyolefin.

D. Cable Cover: Tinned-copper braid, and polyolefin outer jacket with UV inhibitor.

E. Maximum Operating Temperature (Power On): 150 deg F.

F. Maximum Exposure Temperature (Power Off): 185 deg F.

G. Capacities and Characteristics:

The heater shall be sized according to this table. The required heater output rating is in watts per foot based on 40°F maintenance temperature and 1” fiberglass insulation on metal piping. If pipe and insulation installations are different, install per manufacturer recommendations.

Pipe or Equipment Minimum Ambient 10 Degrees F


½ - 1” 3 watt 1 – 1¼ -2” 3 watt 3” 5 watt 4” 5 watt 6” 8 watt

2.2 CONTROLS

A. Remote bulb unit with adjustable temperature range from 30 to 50 deg F.

B. Snap action; open-on-rise, single-pole switch with minimum current rating adequate for connected cable.

C. Remote bulb on capillary, resistance temperature device, or thermistor for directly sensing pipe-wall temperature.

D. Corrosion-resistant, waterproof control enclosure.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Cable Installation Accessories: Fiberglass tape, heat-conductive putty, cable ties, silicone end seals and splice kits, and installation clips all furnished by manufacturer, or as recommended in writing by manufacturer.

B. Warning Labels: Refer to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces and substrates to receive electric heating cables for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Ensure surfaces and pipes in contact with electric heating cables are free of burrs and sharp protrusions.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install electric heating cable across expansion joints according to manufacturer's written recommendations using slack cable to allow movement without damage to cable.

B. Install electric heating cables after piping has been tested and before insulation is installed. Secure the heater to piping with cable ties or Type PF-1 polyester tape.

C. Install electric heating cables according to IEEE 515.1.

D. Install insulation over piping with electric cables according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."

E. Install warning tape on piping insulation where piping is equipped with electric heating cables.

F. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

G. Protect installed heating cables, including nonheating leads, from damage.


H. Interface Points

1. This Contractor shall provide the connections of cables to controllers, devices and accessories in accordance with the heat trace manufacturer’s shop drawings and shall extend power circuits from the junction box, designated on the plans and provided under Division 25, to the heat trace points of connection. The circuit breaker serving the heat trace shall be a GFI, provided by this Contractor and be coordinated between the Division 23 and Division 25 Contractors.

2. Electrical work performed under the mechanical contract shall be performed in accordance with Division 25 Specifications by licensed electricians.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Testing: Perform tests after cable installation but before application of coverings such as insulation, wall or ceiling construction, or concrete.

1. Test cables for electrical continuity and insulation integrity before energizing. 2. Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and

current simultaneously.

B. Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after applying thermal insulation on pipe-mounting cables.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements VIBRATION AND ISOLATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 05 48 Page 1

SECTION 23 05 48

VIBRATION AND ISOLATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric Mounts. 2. Elastomeric Hangers. 3. Restrained Spring Isolators. 4. Spring Hangers.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic and wind forces required to select vibration isolators, and for designing vibration isolation bases. a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for

equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

B. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



1. Kinetics Noise Control 2. Mason Industries


3. Vibro-Acoustics

B. Type EM, Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:

1. Mounting Plates: a. Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and

threaded with threaded studs or bolts. b. Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for

anchoring to support structure. 2. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric

material.

C. Type RS, Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, neoprene isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

D. Type EH, Elastomeric Hanger: Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel contact.

E. Type SH, Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.



deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-

reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and

support spring coil.

F. Type CP, Curb Pad: Pre-compressed molded fiberglass pads formed to fit roof curb and coated with a flexible, moisture impervious elastomeric membrane.


1. Resilient Element: Molded glass fibers with all strands oriented horizontally. Natural frequency of fiberglass vibration isolators shall be essentially constant for the operating load range of the supported equipment.

2. Pad length shall be determined and cut in the field.

2.2 PIPE CONNECTORS


1. Kinetics Noise Control. 2. Mason Industries. 3. Metraflex

B. Type SEFP, Single Sphere Elastomeric Pipe Connector:

1. Material: Single reinforced EPDM sphere with external restraining cables. 2. Complying with the requirements for hydronic pipe in Sections 232113 and

230516.

C. Type DEFP, Double Sphere Elastomeric Pipe Connector:

1. Material: Twin reinforced EPDM spheres with external restraining cables. 2. Complying with the requirements for hydronic pipe in Sections 232113 and

230516.




exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation devices to indicate capacity

range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.



3.2 VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

B. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolts and mounting hole in concrete base.


C. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.






2. Measure isolator deflection. 3. Verify minimum clearances to isolated equipment and pipe. 4. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until




3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.


C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.


3.5 VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE SCHEDULE

Table A

Equipment Vibration Isolation Connections

Notes Type Size RPM Support

Base Type

Iso. Type

Min. Defl.

Pipe Duct

Water Cooled Chiller

All All Floor -- EM 0.1 SEFP -- 1

Cooling Tower

All All Support Structure

-- -- -- SEFP -- 1,3

End Suction Pumps

All All Floor -- RS 1.0 SEFP -- 1

Jockey Pumps All All Hung -- EH 0.1 DEFP -- 1

Air Handling Units

All All Roof -- CP 0.15 SEFP FD 1,2

Direct Drive Horizontal

Fan Coil Units All All Hung -- EH 0.1 HK FD 1


Equipment Vibration Isolation Connections

Notes Type Size RPM Support

Base Type

Iso. Type

Min. Defl.

Pipe Duct

Exhaust Fans All All Roof -- -- -- -- FD 1

A. Legend for Table A

1. See Part 2 above for Base Types and Isolator (Iso) Types. 2. See Part 2 above for elastomeric pipe connectors. 3. “Min Defl” is the isolator minimum design static deflection under load measured

in inches. 4. “Ø” is diameter. 5. “HP” is Horsepower 6. “FD” is flexible duct. See Section 233300 7. “HK” is hose kit complying with the requirements for hydronic pipe in Sections

232113 and 230516.

B. Notes for Table A

1. All electrical connections shall be in flexible conduit. 2. Direct drive fans in fan array shall be individually mounted on neoprene isolators

within the air handling unit. Fans shall be rated BV-5 or BV-6 according to AMCA Standard 204-05.

3. All pipe connections to the cooling towers shall be flexible. 4. Piping within Boiler and Chiller Rooms should be suspended with hanger

isolators equal to kinetics model SRH or supported with isolators equal to kinetics model FHS.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements SEISMIC BRACING FOR MECHANICALSYSTEMS March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 05 49 Page 1

SECTION 23 05 49

SEISMIC BRACING FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. Seismic bracing for mechanical systems (equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit) shall comply with all applicable requirements of the 2012 International Building Code (IBC) including all applicable provisions of the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures (ASCE Standard 7-02). Basic seismic design criteria for each project shall be as listed on the structural drawings for that project.

B. Compliance with the applicable seismic bracing requirements shall be accomplished utilizing the most current version of one of the following design manuals (no exceptions):

C. International Seismic Application Technology (ISAT) Design Manual

D. Mason Industries Seismic Restraint Design Manual

E. Kinetics Noise Control Seismic Design Manual

F. A complete bound copy of the applicable design manual shall be provided to the Owner at the beginning of the construction period for use/reference during the course of the project.

G. Component Importance Factors (Ip) for all mechanical equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit shall be determined and assigned in accordance with ASCE Standard 7-05 Section 13.1.3.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall provide the required number of seismic shop drawing submittal sets for review and approval by the Owner. Submittals shall include a comprehensive set of shop drawings clearly depicting the seismic bracing requirements for all mechanical equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit. Any equipment that does not require seismic bracing shall be specifically identified in the submittal, and the reason for exemption shall be provided.

B. Submittals shall be fully coordinated with the structural drawings and shall include all applicable structural attachment details. Seismic bracing shop drawings shall include all vertical support anchorage loads and all seismic bracing anchorage loads. Each specific load shall be indicated and the structural element that the support is attached to shall be clearly depicted/identified. Seismic bracing submittals shall be stamped and signed by a structural or civil engineer licensed in the State of Nevada.

C. Seismic shop drawing submittals will be reviewed by both the mechanical engineer and the structural engineer.

1.3 SITE VISITS (QUALITY CONTROL)

A. An authorized representative of the seismic bracing system manufacturer shall visit the job site during the construction period to confirm that the seismic bracing installation complies with the shop drawings, with all applicable code requirements, and with the seismic bracing system manufacturer’s written installation requirements and associated

UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements SEISMIC BRACING FOR MECHANICALSYSTEMS March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 05 49 Page 2

details. A minimum of three site visits shall be provided, with the first visit scheduled just prior to installation of the first seismic braces, the second visit at the approximate midpoint of construction, and the third visit when the seismic bracing installation is complete (and prior to installation of ceilings).

B. A written report shall be issued within one week of each site visit summarizing the observations made during the site visit and listing all required corrective actions and/or deficiencies.

C. Site visits shall be coordinated with the Owner and shall be scheduled in writing a minimum of two weeks prior to the proposed site visit date.

1.4 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

A. Fire sprinkler systems shall be braced in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13 as is allowed by ASCE Standard 7-05 Sections 13.6.8.2 and 13.6.8.3.

1.5 SPECIAL INSPECTION

A. Special inspections will be arranged and paid for by the Owner when and if required by 2012 IBC Section 1704. When special inspection is required for a particular system or item of equipment the Contractor shall be available on site during each special inspection to facilitate the on-site review process.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 05 53 Page 1

SECTION 23 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Duct labels. 5. Stencils. 6. Valve tags. 7. Warning tags.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not

less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than

24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with

substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.


C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Red.

C. Background Color: White.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to [cover full] circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.


1. Stencil Material: Aluminum. 2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated.

Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. 3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1

unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass beaded chain.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2. Provide framed/laminated valve chart(s) at wall near equipment.

2.6 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or

"DO NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting."

B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles, complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system.


1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal

units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of

concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25

feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced

labels.

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Chilled Water Piping: a. Background Color: Blue b. Letter Color: White

2. Condenser Water Piping: a. Background Color: Yellow b. Letter Color: White

3. Heating Water Piping a. Background Color: Black b. Letter Color: White

E. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction, may be provided instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

F. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. Chilled Water: 1-1/2 inches (38mm), round b. Condenser Water: 1-1/2 inches (38mm), round c. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Color: a. Chilled Water: Green b. Condenser Water: Green


c. Hot Water: Green. 3. Letter Color:

a. Chilled Water: Black b. Condenser Water: Black c. Hot Water: Black.

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements HVAC INSULATION March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 07 00 Page 1

SECTION 23 07 00

HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulation Materials: a. Cellular glass. b. Flexible elastomeric. c. Mineral fiber. d. Polyisocyanurate or phenolic foam rigid insulation

2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Mastics. 5. Lagging adhesives. 6. Sealants. 7. Factory-applied jackets. 8. Field-applied jackets. 9. Tapes. 10. Securements. 11. Corner angles.


1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation." 2. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.



A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Insulation thickness and R-valve shall comply with ASHRAE/ANSI Standard 90.1-2004.

B. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

C. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

D. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

E. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

F. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

G. Thickness for foam having K-factor of 0.165 may be required from that indicated for mineral fiber insulation having K-factor of 0.24 provided the equivalent thermal resistance is maintained.

H. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:


a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF. b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.

2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II,

Class 1. 6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ-SSL: Comply with

ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2. 7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.

I. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.

J. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation without factory-applied jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation without factory-applied jacket

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp. b. Johns Manville. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning.

K. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation. d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

3. Type II, 1200 deg F (649 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

L. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied FSK jacket complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m) or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F (55 deg C) is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.042 W/m x K) or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex.


c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.

M. Polyisocyanurate or Rigid Phenolic Foam Insulation: Unfaced, preformed, rigid cellular material intended for use as thermal insulation.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Insul-Therm International, Inc. b. Resolco, Insul-Phen insulation c. HiTherm

2. Comply with ASTM C 591, Type I or Type IV, except thermal conductivity (k-value) shall not exceed 0.165 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.027 W/m x K) at 75 deg F (24 deg C) after 180 days of aging.

3. Flame-spread index shall be 25 or less and smoke-developed index shall be 50 or less for thickness up to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) as tested by ASTM E 84.

4. Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. 5. Factory-Applied Jacket: Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"

Article. a. Pipe Applications: ASJ-SSL. b. Equipment Applications: ASJ-SSL.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I. b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.

B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote. b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote.

2. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cellular-Glass and Polyisocyanurate Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F (minus 59 to plus 149 deg C).

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33.

C. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.


D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding

Adhesive. c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. d. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear. e. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.

2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40. f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.



2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30. e. Vimasco Corporation; 136.

2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.


4. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass and Polyisocyanurate Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444. f. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F (Minus 73 to plus 149

deg C). 5. Color: White or gray.

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.


deg C). 5. Color: Aluminum.

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.


deg C). 5. Color: White.

2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:


1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

5. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- (0.10-mm-) thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms (0.013 metric perms) when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following 1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film

and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C;0.03-inch thick; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field

fabricate. a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves,

flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

5. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.

D. Metal Jacket:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14. a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-

bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-

bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.


2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows.

3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting

covers are not available.

2.9 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm). 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mm). 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555. b. Compac Corp.; 130. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC

tape. d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

2. Width: 2 inches (50 mm). 3. Thickness: 6 mils (0.15 mm). 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch (0.7 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch (3.3 N/mm) in width.


D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. b. Compac Corp.; 120. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.

2. Width: 2 inches (50 mm). 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils (0.093 mm). 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch (1.1 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch (6.2 N/mm) in width.

2.10 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following a. Childers Products; Bands. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide with wing or closed seal.

3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide with wing or closed seal.

B. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

C. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) galvanized carbon-steel washer. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following:


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T. 2) GEMCO; Perforated Base. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.

b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square.

c. Spindle: Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm) thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150. 2) GEMCO; R-150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

D. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel.

E. Wire: 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, stainless steel.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following a. C & F Wire. b. Childers Products. c. PABCO Metals Corporation. d. RPR Products, Inc.

2.11 CORNER ANGLES

A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm), aluminum according to ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.

B. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm), stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or 316.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.


L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material

as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.

4. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 5. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material

manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 6. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and

joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.


2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm).

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm).

1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Thermal and Moisture Protection" firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Division 07 Section "Thermal and Moisture Protection".

3.5 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Mineral Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints.

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers

on sides of tanks and vessels as follows: a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels. b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service

temperature and with substrate. c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches (75 mm)

from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. in both directions.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads

of tanks and vessels. f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend



5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials.

6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches (150 mm) from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.

7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches (75 mm). 8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,

handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection.

9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates.

10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels.

1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.

C. Insulation Installation on Pumps:

1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch (150-mm) centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism.

2. Fabricate boxes from stainless steel, at least 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick. 3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and

penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.

3.6 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties

with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from

same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation


to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.


3.7 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION


1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.


3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.




circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.



1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.


1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation


3.8 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus


circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.



1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.9 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION


1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.


3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.




circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.




2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.




2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place

pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), place pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend


4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain

vapor-barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F

(10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches (450 mm) o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.


3.10 POLYISOCYANURATE OR PHENOLIC FOAM INSULATION INSTALLATION


1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with tape or bands and tighten without deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3 and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe.

2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier system.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, same

thickness of adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) thickness.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyisocyanurate block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

C. Insulation Installation on Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.


1. Install preformed sections of polyisocyanurate insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation


3.11 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-

mm-) wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed

insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.

B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.


C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.

D. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.

2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches (50 mm) over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint.

3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond.

4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches (850 mm) or less. The 33-1/2-inch- (850-mm-) circumference limit allows for 2-inch- (50-mm-) overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.

5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.

3.12 FINISHES

A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.

3.13 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 – 2004.


2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Vibration-control devices. 6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.14 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, round and rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. (12-kg/cu. m) nominal density.

B. Concealed, round and rectangular, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. (24-kg/cu. m) nominal density.

C. Outdoor-air plenum insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm)] thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. (24-kg/cu. m) nominal density.

D. Exposed, round and rectangular, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm) thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. (12-kg/cu. m) nominal density.

E. Exposed rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. (12-kg/cu. m) nominal density.

3.15 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.

C. Chillers: Insulate cold surfaces on chillers, including, but not limited to, evaporator bundles, suction piping, compressor inlets, tube sheets, water boxes, and nozzles with one of the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 2. Polyisocyanurate: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

D. Heat-exchanger (water-to-water for cooling service) insulation shall be one of the following:


E. Chilled-water pump insulation shall be one of the following:



F. Heating-hot-water pump insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Cellular Glass: 2 inches (75 mm) thick.

G. Chilled-water air-separator insulation shall be one of the following:


H. Heating-hot-water air-separator insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Cellular Glass: 2 inches (75 mm) thick

3.16 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.17 HVAC PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Indoor Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F (93 Deg C) and below:

1. NPS 1.5 (DN 40) and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1.5 inch (38 mm) thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1.5 inch (38 mm) thick.

2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Insulation shall be the following: a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches (50 mm) thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.

B. Indoor Chilled Water Piping

1. NPS 1.5 (DN 40) and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Polyisocyanurate or Phenolic foam: 1.5 inch ( 38 mm) thick

2. NPS 2 (DN50) and larger: Insulation shall be the following: a. Polyisocyanurate or Phenolic foam: 1.5 inch (38mm) thick

C. Condenser water piping exposed in the cooling tower yard shall be heat traced and insulated with 1 inch (25mm) thick polyisocyanurate insulation.

D. Domestic cold make-up water piping exposed in the cooling tower yard shall be heat traced and insulated with 1 inch (25mm) thick polyisocyanurate insulation.

E. Cooling coil condensate drains shall be insulated with ½ inch (12.7mm) pre-formed fiberglass insulation.

F. Refrigerant piping shall be insulated with 1.5 inch (38mm) thick insulation.


3.18 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE



C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed:

1. None.

D. Piping, Exposed (Including Mechanical Rooms):

1. PVC: 0.03 inches thick. 2. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm)

3.19 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE



C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed:

1. None.

D. Piping, Exposed:

1. Painted Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch (0.41 mm) thick. 2. Stainless Steel, Type 304 or 316, Smooth 2B Finish


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 09 00 Page 1

SECTION 23 09 00

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.


1. Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping" for measuring equipment that relates to this Section.

2. Division 23 Section "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for requirements that relate to this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.

B. I/O: Input/output.

C. BACnet: the ASHRAE building automation and central networking protocol. The BACnet protocol communicates via Ethernet-TCP/IP, MSTP, BACnet IP and PTP.

D. TCP/IP: Transmission control protocol and internet protocol.

E. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.

F. PC: Personal computer.

G. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.

H. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. System Configuration:

1. The Building Management System (BMS) shall perform both monitoring and control of mechanical and electrical equipment for building management, energy conservation, and environmental control.

2. The BMS control philosophy shall be direct digital control and be implemented by a distributed digital system.

3. The BMS shall communicate through dedicated communications network(s). All communications on network shall be by digital signals only. Operator’s workstation shall as minimum support Point-to-Point (PTP) and Ethernet LAN types.


4. The Direct Digital Controllers shall perform remote data acquisition and process control. DDC panels shall be locally mounted completely capable of stand alone operation.

5. Each DDC shall be connected to its particular controlled environment through field input/output (I/O) instrumentation.

6. The BMS system shall be BACNet protocol.

B. Expansion Capability:

1. System Point Capacity. The system shall be expandable to at least twice the number of input/output objects required for this project. Additional controllers (along with associated devices and wiring) shall be all that is necessary to achieve this capacity requirement. The PC operator interfaces installed for this project shall not require any hardware additions or software revisions in order to expand the system.

2. System shall be modular to allow change of function and operation in the filed by plug-in modules, equipment and software changes to expand system capacity without interrupting system operation.

1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Comply with the following performance requirements:

1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 10 seconds.

2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 8 seconds.

3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of a binary object and device reaction.

4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or workstation within six seconds.

5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other.

6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds, but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.

7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan and update process values and outputs at least once per second.

8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured variables within tolerances as follows: a. Water Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F (0.5 deg C). b. Water Flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. c. Water Pressure: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale. d. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F (0.5 deg C). e. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F (0.5 deg C). f. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F (1.0 deg C). g. Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 3 deg F (1.5 deg C). h. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F (0.15 deg C). i. Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 5 percent. j. Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus 3 percent of full scale. k. Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. l. Airflow (Terminal): Plus or minus 10 percent of full scale. m. Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01-inch wg (2.5 Pa). n. Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus 0.1-inch wg (25 Pa). o. Carbon Dioxide: Plus or minus 50 ppm. p. Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.

9. Environmental Conditions: a. The Field Equipment Panels and other equipment shall operate

under continuous ambient environmental conditions of 35 degrees to 122 degrees F dry bulb and 10 percent to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing as a minimum. Sensors and


control elements shall operate under the ambient environmental temperature, pressure, humidity, and vibration conditions encountered for the installed location.

10. Materials and Equipment: a. Where multiple units of the same type are required, the units

shall be products of a single manufacturer, however, the component parts of the system need not be the products of a single manufacturer. The components shall not require customizing other than setting jumpers and switches and adding firmware. Each major component of equipment shall be labeled with the manufacturer’s name, address, model and serial number.

b. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use.

11. Total system shall be immune to internal and external generated sources of electrical noise.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.

1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment.

2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications.

3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number.

2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices.

3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Written description of sequence of operation. 6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics. 7. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics. 8. DDC System Hardware:

a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers. b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control

hardware. c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring,

showing trunk data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit locations.

9. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations.

10. Controlled Systems: a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points

labeled and control elements graphically shown, with wiring.


b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including bases and special construction.

c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.

d. Points list. e. Wiring control interfaces between control components furnished by the

building control contractor and controls embedded within packaged equipment of VFD’s.

C. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with BACNet.

D. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with

data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control

systems.

E. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future systems revisions or monitoring and control revisions.

F. Field quality-control test reports.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Provide Operating Manual to serve as training and reference manual for all aspects of day-to-day operation of the system. As a minimum including the following: a. Control flow diagram. b. Sequence of operation for automatic and manual operating modes. The

sequences shall cross reference the system point names. c. Description of manual overrides operation of control points. d. System manufacturer’s complete operating manuals. e. Troubleshooting sequence, flow diagram and procedures. f. Provide a digital copy of the manual on the CD-ROM format. Document

format shall be Adobe Acrobat Version 8.0 or later. 2. Provide maintenance manual to serve as training and reference manual for all

aspects of day-to-day maintenance and major system repairs. As a minimum include the following:

a. Complete as-built installation drawings for each system including locations on plans of all control devices drawn to scale. As-built drawings shall be submitted in AutoCAD or Visio format.

b. Overall system electrical power supply scheme indicating source of electrical power for each system component.

c. Indicate which components are on emergency power and indicate all battery backup provisions.

d. Overall system shielding and grounding scheme indicating all major components and ground paths.

e. Photographs and drawings showing installation detail and locations of equipment.

f. Charts showing normal operating conditions at significant points such as electrical test points.

g. Routine preventative maintenance procedures, corrective diagnostic troubleshooting procedures, and calibration procedures.


h. Parts list with manufacturer’s catalog numbers and ordering information. i. Lists of ordinary and special tools, operating materials, supplies and test

equipment recommended for operation and servicing. j. Manufacturer’s operating set up, maintenance and catalog literature for

each piece of equipment. k. Recommended spare parts. l. Field test reports. m. Provide a digital copy of the manual on CD-ROM format. Document for it

shall be Adobe Acrobat Version 8.0 or later.


A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project.


C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components.


A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer.

B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1.10 MAINTENANCE

A. Perform complete preventative and emergency maintenance of the BMS for a period of one (1) year in accordance with the Contractor’s recommended standards and schedule. This price shall be itemized to show material costs and labor costs. This price shall be based upon work being executed during normal working hours, but shall include separate emergency callout provisions. Prices submitted should be based upon current price lists and labor rates, details of which shall be included with the bid and should be broken out into four categories.

1. Computer hardware and associated equipment. 2. Field equipment including DDCs, sensors, valves, actuators, and final control

elements. 3. Refrigerant monitor and related devices. 4. Software and programming.

B. The preventative maintenance contract may be renewed annually, at the option of the Owner, up to a total term of 10 years. The annual price shall be negotiated 3 months in advance of annual contract expiry and shall be at the mutual agreement of both parties. Variation in annual prices shall reflect only changes in material and labor costs as substantiated by Federal Guideline Consumer Price Indexes.


1.11 WARRANTY

A. Labor and material for the control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a period of 12 months after final completion and acceptance. Control system failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in service to the Owner. The contractor shall respond to the Owner’s request for warranty service within 24 hours during normal business hours.

B. All work shall have a single warranty date, even when the Owner has received beneficial use due to an early system startup. If the work specified is split into multi-phase contract, then each contract or phase shall have separate warranty start date and period.

C. At the end of the final startup, testing, and commissioning phase, if equipment and systems are operating satisfactorily to the Architect and Owner the date of acceptance shall be the start of pre-warranty endurance test.

D. Operator workstation software, project-specific software, graphic software, database software, and firmware updates which resolve known software deficiencies as identified by the Contractor shall be provided at no charge during warranty period.

E. After the above acceptance tests are complete and the system is demonstrated to be functioning as specified, a thirty-day endurance test period shall begin. If the system functions as specified throughout the endurance test period requiring only routine maintenance and adjustment, the system shall be accepted. If during the endurance test period the system fails to perform as specified and cannot be corrected within eight hours, the Owner may request that the endurance tests be repeated after problems have been correct.

F. After all temperature control sequences have been finalized and have been approved by the Owner and Engineer (and after the HVAC systems commissioning process has been completed) the Contractor shall provide as-built documentation which shall include written control sequences and programming flow charts as may be applicable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Manufacturers:

1. Honeywell

B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to match the existing control system.

C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-click graphics.

D. Provide equipment and programming hardware / software per items listed in this section and 23 09 94 owner requirements for temperature controls.

1. Where specific manufactures and models of components are listed in section 23

09 94, those listed shall be used.


2.02 DDC EQUIPMENT

A. Operator Workstation: One PC-based microcomputer(s) with minimum configuration as follows:

1. Motherboard: With 8 integrated USB 2.0 ports, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet), integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring.

2. Processor: Intel Pentium 4. 3. Random-Access Memory: 1024 MB. 4. Graphics: Video adapter, minimum 1600 x 1200 pixels, 128 MB video memory,

with TV out. 5. Monitor: 21 inches (530 mm), LCD color. 6. Keyboard: QWERTY, 105 keys in ergonomic shape. 7. Hard-Disk Drive: 200 GB. 8. CD-ROM Read/Write Drive: 48x24x48. 9. Mouse: Three button, optical. 10. Uninterruptible Power Supply: 2 kVa. 11. Operating System: Microsoft Windows XP Professional with high-speed Internet

access. a. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Workstation shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol

and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

12. Printer: Color, ink-jet type as follows: a. Print Head: 4800 x 1200 dpi optimized color resolution. b. Paper Handling: Minimum of 100 sheets. c. Print Speed: Minimum of 17 ppm in black and 12 ppm in color.

13. Furnish a folding table (24”x48” maximum size) and two folding chairs with cushioned seats.

14. Application Software: a. I/O capability from operator station. b. System security for each operator via software password and access

levels. c. Automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. d. Database creation and support. e. Automatic and manual database save and restore. f. Dynamic color graphic displays with up to 10 screen displays at once. g. Custom graphics generation and graphics library of HVAC equipment

and symbols. h. Alarm processing, messages, and reactions. i. Trend logs retrievable in spreadsheets and database programs. j. Alarm and event processing. k. Object and property status and control. l. Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power. m. Data collection, reports, and logs. Include standard reports for the

following: 1) Current values of all objects. 2) Current alarm summary. 3) Disabled objects. 4) Alarm lockout objects. 5) Logs.

n. Custom report development. o. Utility and weather reports. p. Workstation application editors for controllers and schedules. q. Maintenance management. r. ASHRAE Guideline 3 report.

15. Custom Application Software: a. English language oriented. b. Full-screen character editor/programming environment. c. Allow development of independently executing program modules with

debugging/simulation capability.


d. Support conditional statements. e. Support floating-point arithmetic with mathematic functions. f. Contains predefined time variables.

B. Diagnostic Terminal Unit: Portable notebook-style, PC-based microcomputer terminal capable of accessing system data by connecting to system network with minimum configuration as follows:

1. System: With two integrated USB 2.0 port, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet), integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring.

2. Processor: Intel Pentium 4. 3. Random-Access Memory: 512 MB. 4. Graphics: Video adapter, minimum 1024 x 768 pixels, 64 MB video memory. 5. Monitor: 17 inches (430 mm), LCD color. 6. Keyboard: QWERTY 105 keys in ergonomic shape. 7. Hard-Disk Drive: 200 GB. 8. CD-ROM Read/Write Drive: 48x24x48. 9. Pointing Device: Touch pad or other internal device.

C. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing. e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field

hardware and controlled environment. 3. Standard Application Programs:

a. Electric Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, on-off control with differential sequencing, staggered start, antishort cycling, PID control, DDC with fine tuning, and trend logging.

b. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and enthalpy switchover.

c. Chiller Control Programs: Control function of chilled-water reset, and equipment sequencing.

d. Programming Application Features: Include trend point; alarm processing and messaging; weekly, monthly, and annual scheduling; energy calculations; run-time totalization; and security access.

e. Remote communications. f. Maintenance management. g. Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric).

4. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

5. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

D. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.


2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

4. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

E. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.

1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power. 2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second. 3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20

mA), or resistance signals. 4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for

normally open or normally closed operation with three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and status lights.

5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current (4 to 20 mA) with status lights, two-position (auto-manual) switch, and manually adjustable potentiometer.

6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point, floating-type electronic actuators.

7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.

F. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:

1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. 2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for

50 percent load changes. 3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150

percent overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.

G. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following:

1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. 2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds. 3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB. 4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.

2.03 UNITARY CONTROLLERS

A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the application.

1. Configuration: Diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios.

2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures.


3. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Communicate using read (execute and initiate) and write (execute and initiate) property services defined in ASHRAE 135. Reside on network using MS/TP datalink/physical layer protocol and have service communication port for connection to diagnostic terminal unit.

4. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C).

B. Controls Contractor shall provide unitary controllers for air volume terminal boxes. Contractor shall have responsibility for the provision of damper actuator, microprocessor based controller, control transformer, velocity pressure transducer, room sensors and all control wiring.

1. Contractor shall have responsibility for start up, checkout, calibration and replacement of all control system components. Contractor shall have responsibility of mounting control components whether components are mounted in the field or at the box manufacturer’s plant.

2. Contractor shall determine compatibility of pressure sensor output provided with terminal box with transducer and control software and provide appropriate and compatible components.

3. Unitary Control System shall perform sequences of control as described in the specifications.

2.04 ELECTRONIC SENSORS

A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required.

B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:

1. Manufacturers: a. Delta Controls or Mamac

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F (0.3 deg C) at calibration point. 3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 18 inches (460 mm) long; use where

not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m).

5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 72 inches (1830 mm) long, flexible; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft. (1 sq. m).

6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).

7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. b. Set-Point Indication: Concealed. c. Thermometer: Exposed.

8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and

security screws.

C. RTDs and Transmitters:

1. Manufacturers: a. Honeywell

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point. 3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 18 inches (460 mm) long; use where

not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m).

5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 24 feet (7.3 m) long, flexible; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m); length as required.


6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).

7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. b. Set-Point Indication: Concealed. c. Thermometer: Exposed.

8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and

security screws.

D. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.


2. Accuracy: 2 percent full range with linear output. 3. Room Sensor Range: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity. 4. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

a. Set-Point Adjustment: [Concealed] [Exposed]. b. Set-Point Indication: [Concealed] [Keyed] [Exposed]. c. Thermometer: [Concealed] [Exposed]

5. Duct Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with element guard and mounting plate.

6. Outside-Air Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with mounting enclosure, suitable for operation at outdoor temperatures of 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C) minus 22 to plus 185 deg F (minus 30 to plus 85 deg C).

7. Duct and Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 to 100 percent relative humidity.

E. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:


2. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated. a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. b. Output: 4 to 20 mA. c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25-inch wg (0 to 62 Pa). d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 5-inch wg (0 to 1240 Pa).

3. Low Static Pressure Transmitter: Used for under floor supply air system. a. Accuracy: 1 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. b. Output: 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 5 VDC. c. Plenum static pressure range: 0 to 0.1 inch wg.

4. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig (1034-kPa) operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

5. Water Differential-Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig (1034-kPa) operating pressure and tested to 300-psig (2070-kPa); linear output 4 to 20 mA.

6. Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential.

7. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for system; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

F. Room sensor accessories include the following:

1. Insulating Bases: For sensors located on exterior walls. 2. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws.


2.5 STATUS SENSORS

A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable range of 0- to 5-inch wg (0 to 1240 Pa).

B. Status Inputs for Filters

1. Differential pressure switch shall incorporate gauge and switch setpoint indicators for continuous indication of applied pressure and switch settings. Operating point shall be adjustable. Range shall suit application.

C. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig (55 to 414 kPa), piped across pump.

D. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current.

E. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy.

F. Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output, with maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor.

G. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements.

H. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel.

I. Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating, stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

1. Manufacturers: a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. I.T.M. Instruments Inc. c. Dwyer

2.6 GAS DETECTION EQUIPMENT

A. Manufacturers:

1. Senva 2. INTEC Controls, Inc. 3. Vaisala.

B. Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state infrared sensors; suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130 deg F (minus 5 to plus 55 deg C) and calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4- to 20-mA output;, for wall mounting.

2.7 THERMOSTATS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Honeywell


B. Combination Thermostat and Fan Switches: Line-voltage thermostat with push-button or lever-operated fan switch.

1. Label switches ["FAN ON-OFF"] ["FAN HIGH-LOW-OFF"] ["FAN HIGH-MED-LOW-OFF"].

2. Mount on single electric switch box.

C. Electric, solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor.

1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling. 2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point. 3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day. 4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31

days. 5. Short-cycle protection. 6. Programming based on every day of week. 7. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24-hour clock,

keyboard disable, remote sensor, and fan on-auto. 8. Battery replacement without program loss. 9. Thermostat display features include the following:

a. Time of day. b. Actual room temperature. c. Programmed temperature. d. Programmed time. e. Duration of timed override. f. Day of week. g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on."

D. Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F (13 to 30 deg C) set-point range, and 2 deg F (1 deg C) maximum differential.

E. Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator; listed for electrical rating; with concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F (13 to 30 deg C) set-point range, and 2 deg F (1 deg C) maximum differential.

1. Electric Heating Thermostats: Equip with off position on dial wired to break ungrounded conductors.

2. Selector Switch: Integral, manual on-off-auto.

F. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes in ambient temperature; with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb. 2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields. 3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements,

extended to cover full width of duct or unit; adequately supported. 4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from

front of instrument. 5. On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings

required by application. 6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper

assembly is removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument.

G. Fire-Protection Thermostats: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction; with fixed or adjustable settings to operate at not less than 75 deg F (24 deg C) above normal maximum operating temperature, and the following:


1. Reset: Manual. 2. Reset: Automatic, with control circuit arranged to require manual reset at central

control panel; with pilot light and reset switch on panel labeled to indicate operation.

H. Immersion Thermostat: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point.

I. Airstream Thermostats: Two-pipe, fully proportional, single-temperature type; with adjustable set point in middle of range, adjustable throttling range, plug-in test fitting or permanent pressure gage, remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element.

J. Electric, Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or automatic- reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches (300 mm) of bulb length is equal to or below set point.

1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet (6 m). 2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. (2 sq. m) of coil surface.

K. Electric, High-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or automatic- reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches (300 mm) of bulb length is equal to or above set point.

1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet (6 m). 2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. (2 sq. m) of coil surface.

L. Heating/Cooling Valve-Top Thermostats: Proportional acting for proportional flow, with molded-rubber diaphragm, remote-bulb liquid-filled element, direct and reverse acting at minimum shutoff pressure of 25 psig (172 kPa), and cast housing with position indicator and adjusting knob.

2.8 HUMIDISTATS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Delta Controls

B. Duct-Mounting Humidistats: Electric insertion, 2-position type with adjustable, 2 percent throttling range, 20 to 80 percent operating range, and single- or double-pole contacts.

2.9 ACTUATORS

A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action. All valve actuators regardless of service shall be proportional modulating except the central plant butterfly valves which shall be two position.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m) and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf (33.9 N x m).

4. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m).


5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m) and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf (33.9 N x m).

6. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m).

7. All proportional actuators shall include a direct and reverse acting to allow for easy adjustment of control direction of rotation. This switch must be adjustable by hand without the use of a tool.

B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.

1. Manufacturers: a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. b. Bray c. Honeywell

2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure.

3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows: a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. (86.8 kg-

cm/sq. m) of damper. b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. (62 kg-

cm/sq. m) of damper. c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft (49.6 kg-

cm/sq. m) of damper. d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. (37.2 kg-

cm/sq. m) of damper. e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg (500 to 750 Pa) of Pressure Drop or Face

Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm (5 to 13 m/s): Increase running torque by 1.5.

f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg (750 to 1000 Pa) of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm (13 to 15 m/s): Increase running torque by 2.0.

4. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. 5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 6. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external,

manual gear release on nonspring-return actuators. 7. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): [24] [120] [230]-V ac. 8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V

dc. 9. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position

feedback signal (for chiller insulation values only). 10. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F. 11. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F. 12. Run Time: 120 seconds.

2.10 CONTROL VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Belimo. 2. Bray 3. Honeywell

B. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:


1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Class 125 bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure.

2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc, flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc.

3. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless-steel or brass seats. a. Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces

for plug on top and bottom. b. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and

guiding surfaces for plugs on top and bottom. 4. Sizing: 5-psig (35-kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the

following: a. Two Position: Line size. b. Two-Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the load

pressure drop, whichever is more. c. Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than

value specified above. 5. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage

characteristics; three-way valves shall have linear characteristics. 6. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall

provide minimum close-off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for two-way valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or 100 percent of total system (pump) head.

7. Warranty: 3 year manufacturer’s warranty from date of shipping.

D. Butterfly Valves: 200-psig (1380-kPa), 150-psig (1034-kPa) maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. 1. Body Style: Wafer, Lug or Grooved. 2. Disc Type: Nickel-plated ductile iron. 3. Sizing: 1-psig (7-kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.

E. Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends.

1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig (860 kPa) and 250 deg F (121 deg C) operating conditions.

2. Sizing: 3-psig (21-kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff head.

3. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-way valves shall have linear characteristics.

2.11 DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance Inc. 2. Ruskin. 3. Pottorff.

B. Dampers: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; 0.108-inch- (2.8-mm-) minimum thick, galvanized-steel or 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches (200 mm) and length of 48 inches (1220 mm).

1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-


plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).

3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed-cell neoprene. 4. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or

replaceable rubber blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. (50 L/s per sq. m) of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg (1000 Pa) when damper is held by torque of 50 in. x lbf (5.6 N x m); when tested according to AMCA 500D.

2.12 AIRFLOW / TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT DEVICES

A. Subject to compliance with all requirements of this section, provide products that comply with this specification by one of tile following vendors:

1. EBTRON, Inc. Model GTC116-PC (basis of design) 2. Paragon Controls Incorporated 3. Air Monitor Corporation Any product submitted as an equal shall be expected to comply with all perfor-

mance, capabilities and functional aspects of this specification. Submitting ven-dors will also be required to present a functioning, non-fan powered, 120VAC demonstration sample for review in the specifying engineer’s office. Nonfunction-ing samples will not be considered and submissions will be rejected. Duct-mounted air flow measuring stations shall be installed with a minimum of 24” of straight duct upsteam of the sensor and with a minimum of 12” of straight duct downstream of the sensor. Duct sizing shall ensure a minimum velocity of 250 fpm.

B. Installation Requirements

1. Provide one thermal dispersion airflow/temperature measurement device (ATMD) at each location indicated on the plans, schedules and/or control schematics. a. Fan inlet measurement devices shall not be used unless indicated on

drawings or schedules. b. Each ATMD shall consist of one to four sensor probes and a single,

remote transmitter. Each sensor probe shall consist of one to eight independent sensor nodes in a gold anodized, aluminum 6063 alloy tube with 304 stainless steel mounting brackets.

c. Each sensor node shall consist of two hermetically sealed bead-in-glass thermistors. Chip thermistors of any type or packaging are not acceptable.

d. The temperature output of the ATMD can be used in place of the specified temperature measuring device (TMD) when the location of the ATMD and TMD are effectively the same.

e. Sensor Density Requirements: 1) Sensor density (#/area) affects minimum installed distances

required from disturbance types. Published sensor density data by the product manufacturer shall be submitted for approval.

2) Should there be no published document indicating these relationships for a particular product, the number of individual sensor nodes provided for each rectangular location shall be as follows:

• Duct or Plenum Area (ft2) • Total # Nodes / Location • Duct or Plenum Area (m2) <= 1 1 or 2 <= 0.093 >1 to <4 4 >0.093 to < 0.372 4 to < 8 6 0.372 to < 0.743 8 to < 12 8 0.743 to < 1.115 12 to <16 12 1.115 to < 1.486


>=16 16 >= 1.486

3) The number of individual sensor nodes for each rectangular location shall be maximized for performance within the placement conditions provided. In no instance shall field selected locations provide less distance between disturbances than required for maximum performance. When minimum distances allowed by the highest density of sensor distribution are exceeded, a lower density configuration that provides the same performance is acceptable.

4) The number of individual sensor nodes provided for each round or oval duct location shall approximate the total required for rectangular locations or be detailed in published documentation by the manufacturer.

5) Submittal documents shall include schedules indicating the number of sensors per location, the duct area and the equivalent density (#/area) for approval.

f. Thermistors shall be potted in an engineering thermoplastic assembly using water-proof, marine epoxy and shall not be damaged by moisture or direct contact with water.

g. Signal processing circuitry on or in the sensor probe is not acceptable. h. Each sensing node shall be individually wind tunnel calibrated at 16

points to NIST traceable airflow standards. i. Each sensing node shall be individually calibrated in constant

temperature oil baths at 3 points to NIST traceable temperature standards.

j. All internal wiring between thermistors and probe connecting cables shall be Kynar jacketed.

k. Manufacturer shall provide UL listed, FEP jacketed, plenum rated cable(s) between sensor probes and the remote transmitter.

2. Measurement Performance

a. Each sensing node shall have a temperature accuracy of ± 0.14°F (0.08°C) over the entire operating temperature range of -20°F to 160°F (-28.9°C to 71°C).

b. Each sensing node shall have an airflow accuracy of ± 2% of reading. c. The ATMD shall be capable of measuring airflow rates over the full range

of 0 to 5,000 FPM (25.4 m/s) between -20°F to 160°F (-28.9°C to 71°C).

3. Integral Transmitter and Communications

a. The transmitter shall be powered by 24 VAC, be over-voltage and over-current protected, and have a watchdog circuit to provide continuous operation after power failures and/or brown-outs.

b. The power requirement for the ATMD shall not exceed 22 V-A. c. The transmitter shall determine the airflow rate and temperature of each

sensing node prior to averaging. d. The transmitter shall have two isolated and fused analog output signals

and one RS-485 network connection. e. Each analog output shall be field configurable as linear 0-5/1-5 VDC, 0-

10/2-10 VDC or 4-20mA signals. f. The RS-485 network connection shall be field configurable as BACnet

MS/TP or Modbus RTU. g. The RS-485 connections shall transmit the average airflow rate, average

temperature, individual airflow rates of each sensor node, and individual temperatures of each sensor node and system status.


h. All integrated circuits shall be industrial rated for operation down to -40°F (-40°C).

i. All electrical plugs, receptacles and circuit board interconnects shall be gold plated.

4. Listings and Certifications a. The ATMD shall be UL 973 listed. b. The ATMD shall be BTL listed.

5. The manufacturer’s authorized representative shall review and approve placement and operating airflow rates for each measurement location indicated on the plans, prior to fabrication and installation. a. A written report shall be submitted to the consulting mechanical engineer

if any measurement locations do not meet the manufacturer’s placement requirements.

2.13 LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM

A. Provide lead detection system in MDF room.

2.14 SOFTWARE

A. General:

1. Fully implement, optimize, and commission all software described under this paragraph and required for a complete operable system.

2. Although “Program” implies software, hardware solutions may be acceptable after review and approval of authorized representative. Such differences shall be considered deviations and presented as such.

3. Software programs are described as to general intent. It is recognized that BMS contractors’ software differ; however, the programs that are provided shall incorporate the features described.

4. Each point shall be identified in software with a unique point name of not less than 8 alphanumeric characters. Point names shall be logically and consistently coded to allow identification of the point location (e.g. Building, MER) associated HVAC system (e.g. AHU-1, B-1) and point function (e.g. supply temp, freezestat) as minimum.

B. Executive Software:

1. The executive software shall include programs require for systems, application, peripheral devices and communications networks.

2. Restrict user software modifications to insure system security. User access to the executive software shall be provided as follows: a. Ability to switch failing output devices to another device without loss of

data or otherwise handle device failures (e.g. jammed printers). b. Ability to modify the priorities and scheduling of application programs. c. Ability to add or delete peripheral devices.

3. Provide diagnostic programs to report and display DDC system failures at the Operator’s console both on video display and printer. Provide on-line error detection and messages for the discs, power supplies, CPU’s, communications boards and peripherals. Upon failure of a video display system, the system shall be operable using the printers and keyboards.

4. Provide a software time clock which shall display date, time information where required to resolution of one second and otherwise supply data programs at resolution of 0.1 seconds; display real time clock in 12 hours or 24 hours format and date. Time and date shall be resettable by mouse or keyboard entry.

5. Peripheral Equipment Selection: a. Provide peripheral equipment selection control to apportion data to

peripheral console as required (e.g. alarms to alarm printer).


b. Appointment of data and control functions shall be a programmable function by an authorized operator at any console. Initialization of the appointment of data shall be according to the description of the functional requirements stated under each console description. Contractor shall provide all software and programming time required to initialize the system. Submit initial apportionment for all monitored and control functions for review prior to final programming.

c. The graphics display shall allow simultaneous operator interaction and alarm indication in separate on-screen windows.

6. System Access Control: Provide a minimum of three levels of access using selectable passwords to the system software. Each higher level will increase the allowed interaction by the user. Each password must be entered by the operator to access a particular level of system operation. The password shall not be displayed or printed. Each password shall be unique for each operator.

C. Operator Interface Program:

1. Provide Microsoft Windows compatible software as the operator interface with the BMS for defining and selecting points, parameters, report generation, graphics, time schedules and all functions associated with day-to-day operation of the system.

2. Provide software to notify the operator of the occurrence of an alarm condition. All alarm messages displayed on the video terminal, on the local printer, and on the remote printer shall be in simple English-language format. System shall print and sound an audible alarm at each occurrence. Operator acknowledgment shall silence the audible alarm. System shall print upon return to normal.

3. Report generation software shall be provided to present system information in an organized manner: a. System Point Log: A log for each system shall include all points required

for operation and monitoring of the system. Do not include points used in intermediate calculations and program logic or points used for system tuning and set up.

b. Display for each Point Name, Point Description, Current Value, Engineering Units, Alarm Status and Command Priority.

c. Application program logs: Log for each program shall include current values of all points and parameters used in application program.

d. Summary logs: Logs shall summarize system status. Include as minimum:

e. Alarm Summary f. Run time totalization summary g. Disabled point summary

4. Provide fully implemented interactive graphics with latest available process data fully integrated with the display. Point values shall be dynamically updated at an operator selectable rate from 5 to 120 seconds a. Provide a minimum of 32 different operator selectable colors for the

various system components to facilitate rapid recognition and ease of interaction. Colors shall be uniform on all displays, such as all meter alarms red blinking with reverse field.

b. Graphics generation and editing shall be via Windows based mouse-operated interactive software.

c. Provide graphics for, but not limited to, the following: 1) Scale floor plans of each level showing status of associated

points within area including but not limited to: smoke detectors, HVAC equipment, controls, sensors. Indicate locations of equipment within area such as transmitters, actuators, sensors, etc.

2) Separate air and water systems riser diagrams showing all systems in block diagram form. System status (on, off, alarm) shall be indicated. Risers shall include common sensing points


such as outside air and supply and return temperature in main piping systems.

3) Each air and water system. d. Provide dynamic graphic features to convey the status of fan, pump, coil

valve and dampers, and condition of alarm/overrides. 5. Provide software to output a user programmed message to the printer or video

terminal in response to an alarm or change of value of any system point. Message length shall be at least 4 lines of 80 characters each.

6. All software shall be mouse operated (point and click; drop-and-drag, etc.) with the option of using predefined keyboard commands.

7. Provide a notifier graphic on each main graphic screen of each piece of equipment indicating any associated parameter which has been placed in manual or override mode.

D. Application Software:

1. Time of Day and Event Scheduling: a. Software shall automatically start and stop equipment based on the time

of day and day of week, including holidays and the type of event. The scheduled time-of-day program shall operate in conjunction with the Start/Stop Time Optimization program.

b. Schedule assignments shall be for individual points or group of points. For points assigned to one group, assign variable time delays between each successive start or stop command within that group if required. The system shall have the capacity to accommodate a minimum of 500 uniquely defined schedules. Each load group shall be capable of accommodating a minimum of 250 loads. Initialize the system with Owner schedules and load assignments.

c. The operator shall be able to define the following information: 1) Time, day, dates. 2) Commands such as on, off, auto, etc. 3) Loads or loads assigned to groups. 4) Time delays between successive commands. 5) Include provisions for manually overriding each schedule. 6) The following reports shall be provided:

i. Report of any and all defined time schedules. ii. Loads assigned to each time schedule.

2. Start/Stop Time Optimization (SSTO). a. Software shall perform optimized start-up and shutdown of selected

equipment. The SSTO program shall start HVAC equipment at the latest possible time that will allow the equipment to achieve the desired zone conditions by occupancy time. The SSTO program shall also shutdown HVAC equipment at the earliest possible time before the end of the occupancy period, and still maintain desired comfort conditions. Initialize the system with default values used on previous projects of similar construction with similar equipment.

b. The SSTO program shall operate in both the heating and cooling seasons. It shall be possible to apply the SSTO program to all individual systems.

c. The SSTO program shall operate on outside weather conditions, as well as relate to the dynamic responsiveness of particular zones such as heat retention and transfer coefficients. The program shall be fine tuned during the warranty period using empirical data complied during operation of the building.

d. The program shall automatically adjust itself utilizing adaptive control techniques.

e. The system operator shall be able to, for each system under control of the SSTO program, establish and modify the following parameters.

f. Occupancy period g. Desired occupancy temperature


h. Heating/cooling transfer coefficients i. Heating/cooling retention coefficients j. Primary equipment lag time f. A report shall be provided detailing SSTO parameters such as zone

coefficients, zone occupancy time and temperature, activated/inactivated zones, etc.

3. Automatic Restart: During a power outage the DDC operating programs and database shall be protected against loss of memory with battery backup. If length of the power outage exceeds the battery backup capacity, the programs and database shall be automatically reloaded from disk storage upon power restoration. After power has been restored, the system points shall either be returned to the state they would be in if there were no power outage or remain off as defined by equipment and operational requirements. Points to be restarted shall start over a programmed time schedule to affect soft start.

4. Automatic False Alarm Lockout: When systems are off, certain analog variable may drift past programmed alarm limits. Inhibit analog variable limit alarms until after system is restarted and stabilized.

5. Historical Trending: a. Any system points either real or calculated shall be assignable to the

historical trending program. All changes in point value shall be recorded for points assigned. The trend interval shall be user selectable.

b. All trend information shall be recorded in non-volatile memory and graphically displayed. Display shall accommodate up to twelve different point trends simultaneously displayed in user selectable colors and dynamically updated.

c. The system shall allow trending of points and storage/archival for a minimum of 365 days.

6. Customer Application Program: a. Provide real-time control programming capability to allow operator to

create customized control strategies based on arithmetic, logical, conditional and time logic.

7. Remote Alarm and Communication Software: The BMS shall have the ability to alarm and communicate with other off site PC by using the modem dial out/in using BACnet Point to Point service or PC Anywhere or equal commercial software. The BMS shall have the ability to notify the Owner via voice or numeric pager of serious alarms on the BMS.

E. Web Access:

1. The system shall be capable of supporting at least 10 clients using a standard web browser such as Internet Explorer, or Netscape Navigator. System requiring additional software to enable standard web browser are not acceptable.

2. The web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration that is supported by the web browser.

3. The web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that require different means on interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be permitted.

4. The web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions:

a. User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be implemented.

b. Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the web browser. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI shall be supported by the web browser interface.


c. HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a web page. HTML editing of the web page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific look or format.

d. Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the BMS, without requiring any graphics to be stored on the web access computer.

e. Real-time values displayed on a web page shall update automatically without requiring a manual “refresh” of the web page.

f. Users shall have administer-defined access privileges. Depending n the access privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following: 1) Modify common application objects, such as schedules,

calendars and set points in a graphical manner. i. Schedule times will be adjusted using a

graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.

ii. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.

g. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required.

h. View logs and charts. i. View and acknowledge alarms. j. Graphics screens on the web browser client shall support hypertext links

to other locations on the Internet or on the Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the desired link.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that power supply is available to control units and operator workstation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.

B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.

C. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches (1220 mm) above the floor.

1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern and securely in the airstream.

D. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:

1. Where indicated.

E. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

F. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures.

G. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."


H. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping."

I. Install steam and condensate instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23 Section "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping."

J. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air ducts.

3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26.

B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26.

C. Install Building Automation System signal and communication cable according to Division 27.

D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position.

F. The contractor is responsible for all low voltage wiring and control required to supply all the control items noted in Division 22 and 23. Line voltage power wiring to serve VAV/CV terminal boxes and control panels shall be by Division 26. Provide all transformers, wiring, connections and accessories per Division 26 requirements. All VAV/CV terminal box transformers shall be installed by terminal box manufacturer for installation by terminal box manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating

control set points are as required. 4. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with

sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions. 5. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 6. Test software and hardware interlocks.

C. DDC Verification:

1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks.

2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion

depth, and other applicable considerations. 4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support. 5. Check installation of air supply for each instrument.


6. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet side is identified and that meters are installed correctly.

7. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-contained pressure regulators.

8. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 9. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction. 10. Check DDC system as follows:

a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable.

b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system.

c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.

D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Calibrating and Adjusting:

1. Calibrate instruments. 2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog

instrument. 3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written

recommendations and instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated.

4. Control System Inputs and Outputs: a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent

output. c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire. d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or

breaking. e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span

using a precision-resistant source. 5. Flow:

a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3-point calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span.

b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact. 6. Pressure:

a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable

differential set at minimum. 7. Temperature:

a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistance source.

b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts. 8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the

manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and closed.

9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed.

10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system. 11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type

of instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures.


B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.6 TRAINING

A. The contractor shall furnish the services of competent instructors to give instruction in the adjustment, operation and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the equipment and system specified. The training shall be oriented toward the system installed rather than being a general training course. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. The Contractor shall provide all equipment and material required for classroom training.

B. The training program shall be accomplished in two phases for the time interval specified for each phase.

1. The first phase shall be given prior to the acceptance test period at a time mutually agreeable between the Contractor and the Owner, and shall be at least two (2) days (8) hours/day) in length. Operating personnel shall be trained in the functional operations of the BMS installed and the procedures that the operators will employ for system operation. The training shall include but not be limited to: a. General BMS configuration. b. Operation of computer and peripherals. c. Command line mnemonics d. Report generation. e. Operator control functions. f. Graphics generation. g. General equipment layout. h. Troubleshooting procedures. i. Preventative maintenance procedures. j. Sensor maintenance and calibration. k. Proper use of service kit.

2. The second phase shall be conducted after system acceptance testing for a period of two (2) days eight (8 hours/day) in length. The training shall occur up to one (1) year after the first phase of training as determined by the Owner and shall include but not be limited to: a. DDC programming. b. Database generation. c. Supervisory level operator commands. d. Topics requested by Owner.

C. The Contractor shall provide two contacts with phone numbers which can be called to address any questions the Owner might have while operating the system.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements OWNER REQUIREMENTS FOR TEMPERATURE CONTROLS March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 09 94 Page 1

SECTION 23 09 94

OWNER REQUIREMENTS FOR TEMPERATURE CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. The control system shall provide direct digital control with a Windows-based user interface. The manufacturer and/or his authorized representative shall be responsible for all work under this section of the specifications. Only pre-approved manufacturers and contractors will be allowed and shall be as follows (no substitutions):

Manufacturers

Honeywell

B. Furnish and install a microprocessor-based energy management and control system (EMCS) complete with computer terminal (when specified), modem, surge suppressor, operating software, and training. Install temperature control system software (most current edition) on existing computers at UNLV (in addition to the software to be installed on the computer at the project site). When third party software is necessary to allow for control system programming and/or editing of graphic displays that software (most current edition) shall also be provided on each of the aforementioned computers.

C. There shall be no annual maintenance or licensing fees of any kind required to be paid by the Owner at any time during the ongoing use of the installed system and software. Licenses shall be issued and authorized as directed by the State Public Works Division and UNLV. Licenses shall be issued such that they can be modified by UNLV or the State Public Works Division without the permission of the contractor and/or local system integrator. Specific license wording and format shall be provided as part of the contractor’s submittals.

D. The system shall incorporate a dedicated rack-mount server (primarily for storage of graphics and/or trend data) with wall-mount rack. The Controls system shall utilize Honeywell Network Controllers and shall utilize web-based graphic interface software (most current version). Communication between the network controller and the equipment controllers shall be via Ethernet backbone (100.0 Mbps minimum speed). Communication between the equipment controllers and application specific controllers shall be via LonWorks or BACnet MS/TP network (76.8k minimum speed). The control system shall be furnished with an Ethernet connection to allow for direct connection of an on-site computer and/or connection of multiple computers via a local area network.

E. User interface software shall be Microsoft Windows-based, and shall be compatible with Microsoft Windows 7 Professional software. Third party viewing software will not be acceptable.

1.2 ON-SITE COMPUTER

A. Provide a desktop computer for on-site interface/communication with the temperature control system. Computer shall be Dell, or approved equal by Gateway. The desktop computer shall include, as a minimum, a 3.3 GHz Pentium i5 processor, 8 GB SDRAM, 24" widescreen flat-panel color monitor, 1.0 TB hard drive, 16x DVD+/-RW drive, 10/100 Ethernet card, speakers, keyboard, mouse, mouse pad, surge suppressor with receptacles for the computer and all accessories, and Microsoft Windows 7 Professional software.


B. Furnish a folding table (48" x 30" minimum size) and two folding chairs (with cushioned seats).

C. Provide plastic dust covers for the computer, the monitor, and the keyboard.

1.3 SPARE CONTROLLER CAPACITY

A. All controllers (except application-specific controllers for VAV boxes) shall be furnished with a minimum of 20 percent spare capacity to allow for addition of both analog and digital inputs and outputs. Expansion cards will not be accepted as a means of providing additional inputs and/or outputs to meet this requirement.

1.4 SUBMITTALS AND AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION

A. The submittals shall include complete written control sequences for each item of equipment requiring control. The sequences shall include all setpoints, dead-bands, throttling ranges, etc. required for successful operation of the specified equipment. The submitted sequences shall include all necessary sequencing details, whether or not those details are furnished as part of the Mechanical Engineer’s written control sequences (such details are commonly excluded from the Mechanical Engineer’s written control sequences) and all work associated with developing and incorporating those details shall be provided by the Temperature Control Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. The written control sequences, initial setpoints, dead-bands, throttling ranges, and the graphic displays shall all be reviewed and confirmed with UNLV and the State Public Works Division prior to preparing and forwarding the finalized submittals.

B. The Temperature Control Contractor shall prepare and submit a complete listing of data points that are to be set up as trended and stored historical data. The list shall be broken down to include each system and/or item of equipment and shall be reviewed with UNLV and the State Public Works Division prior to setting up the trending in the temperature control system.

C. After all temperature control sequences have been finalized and have been approved by the State Public Works Division and the Engineer (and after the HVAC systems commissioning process has been completed) the Contractor shall provide as-built documentation which shall include both an electronic copy of the finalized programming and hard copy of the finalized programming (programming flow charts or line code as may be applicable) and written control sequences. The finalized programming shall also be stored on the computer or server at the job site.

1.5 TRAINING

A. Upon completion of the commissioning process, the Temperature Control Contractor shall instruct the Owner’s designated personnel on the operation of all control system software features, shall provide a complete explanation of the control sequence for each item of equipment, and shall provide instructions on the operation and maintenance of all control devices. Training time shall be a minimum of twelve total hours (consisting of three separate 4 hour sessions).

1.6 WARANTY PERIOD SERVICES

A. The Contractor shall provide full service for the temperature control system for a period of one year after the date of Substantial Completion. Service shall include, as a minimum, calibration of all sensors and other control devices, adjustments to setpoints, and modifications to control sequences or programming as required/desired to fine-tune and/or finalize all control sequences.


B. The Contractor shall provide a scheduled monitoring and reporting service for the duration of the one year warranty period. Monitoring shall be conducted via the remote control system interface (via modem or network connection) and the associated report shall be issued via email the same day that the monitoring is conducted. Monitoring shall be conducted on a weekly basis, preferably on either Monday or Tuesday. Reports shall include a specific listing of all alarms, all equipment failures, and any noted operational problems or irregularities.

C. The Contractor shall maintain and pay for virtual private network access to the temperature control system through the State Department of Information Technology for the duration of the warranty period.

1.7 SOFTWARE AND PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide a security/password system with two passwords (username and password) of up to four characters each. The security/password system shall allow access based on four levels of security as follows:

Level 1 Viewing only Level 2 Room temperature and occupancy schedule adjustment Level 3 Adjustment of all setpoints Level 4 Full access to all setpoints and programming

B. The Temperature Control Contractor shall program the eleven State Holidays into the EMCS software for the five years following the date of the installation.

C. Equipment Schedules - A separate occupied/unoccupied schedule shall be provided for each air handling unit, fan coil unit, exhaust fan, and/or other individual air handling system.

1.8 GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

A. All temperature setpoints and all other setpoints identified as adjustable in the written control sequence shall be adjustable from the appropriate graphic display(s). Setpoints listed in the contract documents are for initial set-up and trial of system operations. Control system shop drawings shall utilize the same (or similar) written sequences with all setpoints, throttling ranges, and differentials identified. As-built drawings shall include this same information with final setpoints resulting from start-up, testing, and adjustment.

B. Monitored points and alarms for each system shall be shown on the displays with full color graphics and real-time data as listed below. Where indicated, graphic displays shall be dynamic (animated). All graphic displays shall be submitted to the State Public Works Division for review and approval prior to commencing any programming. Required screen resolution shall be confirmed with UNLV and the State Public Works Division (in writing) prior to development of graphic displays (note that the typical graphic display screen resolution is 1024 by 768).

C. All temperatures shall be displayed with zero decimal places.

D. All valve and damper positions shall be displayed as percent open and shall be displayed with zero decimal places.

E. All setpoints which are identified as “adjustable” in the written control sequences shall be adjustable via the associated graphic displays (including deadband between room setpoints).

F. All occupied mode and unoccupied mode room temperature setpoints shall have an adjustable deadband (adjustable from the associated graphic display).


G. All displays specified to be dynamic shall depict motion (as a minimum dynamic displays shall include chiller compressors, boiler burners, rotating fan wheels, and rotating pump impellers).

H. All setpoints adjustable from the graphic displays shall be programmed with the deadband on one side of the setpoint (not split evenly across the setpoint) unless otherwise specified.

I. All inputs and outputs shall be programmed with the capability to override the controlled commands/positions via the associated graphic display (this requirement applies to all equipment, valves, dampers, fans, pumps, etc.).

J. Data fields containing adjustable data or setpoints shall have a light gray background. Data fields containing automatic data or setpoints shall have a white background.

K. Data fields containing automatic and/or calculated values shall be displayed with a yellow background whenever the normal values are overridden (e.g., valve and damper positions, pump, vfd, and equipment enable fields, vfd input speed, current room temperature, current vav box cfm setpoint, current CO2 level, lead pump, lead boiler, outside air economizer mode status, etc.).

L. Alarm data fields shall be displayed with a red background when an alarm condition exists.

M. A set of zone temperature summary screens shall indicate the current room temperature setpoint and current room temperature for each zone. A separate global setpoint and deadband shall be assigned to all zones associated with each air handling unit. The zone summary screens shall also include additional information for each zone such as the remote setpoint and deadband, discharge air temperature, valve position, fan command, fan status, deadband setpoint(s), etc. Summary screen format, function, and required display data shall be coordinated with UNLV and the State Public Works Division prior to developing the graphic displays.

N. Each zone shall be capable of being set to any of three setpoints (depending on which setpoint is selected). The three available setpoints shall be the global setpoint (a single setpoint for all associated zones), the remote setpoint (a separate individually adjustable setpoint for each zone), and the local setpoint (adjustable at the room sensor by utilizing a slide or dial type control on the room sensor). The local setpoint adjustment range shall be programmed to allow adjustment only between a fixed temperature range (typically between 72ºF and 76ºF - range to be confirmed with UNLV and the State Public Works Division prior to programming).

O. The current total cfm of all vav boxes associated with each vav air handling unit shall be calculated and displayed on the appropriate air handling unit screen.

P. Each variable frequency drive shall be programmed to display command, status (via current sensor), input speed, output speed, and alarm/failure status (via alarm contacts at each vfd).

Q. Outside air temperature sensors which are capable of sensing both temperature and humidity shall be programmed to display dry bulb temperature, wet bulb temperature, and relative humidity.

R. Floor Plan(s) - Provide a display showing the building floor plan(s) with all space temperature sensors including identification of the associated terminal unit or fan coil unit number. Specifically identify each thermal zone on the associated floor plan (AutoCAD file with thermal zone borders can be obtained from the mechanical engineer at no cost


to the Contractor). The current room temperature status shall be indicated utilizing a colored box (or colored room sensor) in each zone. Color coding shall be as follows:

Light Gray: Within Control Range Light Blue: >2ºF below setpoint Dark Blue: >4ºF below setpoint Orange: >2ºF above setpoint Red: >4ºF above setpoint

S. The finalized sequence of operation shall be inserted into the graphics for viewing as a pdf file.

1.9 SPECIALTY CONTROL DEVICES AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Outdoor temperature sensor (combination dry bulb and humidity) shall be Vaisala Model HMT-333 with solar radiation and precipitation shield (Vaisala Model DTR502B). Sensor outputs shall include dry bulb temperature, wet bulb temperature, and relative humidity (wet bulb temperature calculated via integral microprocessor which shall also be capable of calculating dewpoint temperature). Sensor accuracy shall be plus or minus 1% (between 0% and 90% RH). The contractor shall adjust the atmospheric pressure setting in the microprocessor (utilizing the microprocessor’s RS-232 port and a laptop computer with ‘Hyper-terminal’ software) as required to correct the device’s output for the project altitude.

B. Building static pressure sensor shall have a control range of ± .10” w.c. Sensor shall be Mamac Model PR-275-R2, Dwyer Model MS2-W101-LCD, Veris Industries Model PX-01-F (fast response), or Setra Model 264-0R1WB, and shall be furnished with indoor and outdoor reference probes.

C. Outdoor static pressure reference probe shall be constructed of anodized aluminum and shall be capable of sensing static pressure to within 2% accuracy when subject to radial wind velocities of up to 80 mph with an approach angle of up to 30 degrees from horizontal (‘Static Outside Air Probe’ as manufactured by Air Monitor Corporation, Santa Rosa, California).

D. Indoor static pressure reference probe(s) shall be suitable for flush mounting, shall be constructed of 10 gauge brushed aluminum, and shall be capable of sensing static pressure to within 1% accuracy when subject to air velocities of up to 1,000 fpm (‘Shielded Static Air Probe No. 3’ as manufactured by Air Monitor Corporation). Provide a surge dampener for each indoor static pressure probe/sensor (Schneider Electric Model 21-153 or Kele & Associates Model SD-01). Interconnecting copper tubing between sensor and indoor/outdoor probes shall be 3/8” diameter.

E. Refrigerant leak monitor shall be MSA Model LE photo-acoustic infrared sensor with single point sensing capability, dual alarm outputs, and the capability to transmit current refrigerant concentration (utilizing a 0 to 10 volt signal) for remote monitoring via the direct digital control system. Provide sensor suitable for sensing refrigerant R-134A (or as required for the specified chiller). Provide two remote sensing probes with end-of-line filters and interconnecting tubing as required to locate the probes as indicated on the drawings (or as field-directed by the mechanical engineer). Interconnecting tubing shall be installed such that the branch tubing to each sensor is the same length. Probes shall be mounted at approximately 6” above finished floor at or near each chiller. Sensor shall be factory calibrated to alarm at 1,000 ppm. The refrigerant leak monitor shall be furnished with a calibration/test kit (MSA Model 50G) and with the appropriate test gas cylinders as required for calibration, testing, and commissioning of the leak monitor.

F. The refrigerant leak monitor shall also be furnished with two spare end-of-line filters for future use by the Owner. Locate two alarm horn/strobes at each chiller room exit (one inside and one outside of each exit door). Install each horn/strobe at approximately 7'-6"


above finished floor. Remote audible/visible alarm horn/strobes shall be suitable for either indoor or outdoor installation (Amseco Model CSHB-BG with blue light lens, or approved equal by Kele & Associates).

G. Chiller room exhaust fan differential pressure switches (one required for each exhaust fan) shall be Dwyer Instruments Model 1640-0 with Kele Model SSS-1003 duct sensing probes.

H. Air filter differential pressure sensors shall be Dwyer Model MS2-W102-LCD, or approved equal.

I. Differential pressure sensors for dry applications shall be Veris Industries Model PX, Dwyer Model MS2-W102-LCD, or approved equal. Differential pressure sensors for wet applications shall be Veris Industries Model PW2. Verify desired/required sensing range prior to submitting and/or ordering.

J. Sensors for room differential pressure (such as at laboratory spaces) shall have a control range of ± .10” w.c. Sensors shall be Veris Industries Model PX-01-F (fast response) or Setra Model 2641-0R1WB, furnished with Air Monitor Corporation Model SAP probes, or shall be Ebtron Model STA102-B transmitter with Ebtron Model SB1 bleed sensor.

K. Current sensors for fan and pump motors under 3 horsepower shall be split core digital output type and shall have an adjustable setpoint capability. Current sensors shall be Hawkeye Model H908 or Model H938 (manufactured by Veris Industries).

L. Current sensors for fan and pump motors 3 horsepower and larger shall be split core analog output type and shall have an adjustable amperage range. Current sensors shall be Hawkeye Model H923 (manufactured by Veris Industries).

M. Current sensors for chiller compressors shall be split core analog output type and shall have an adjustable amperage range. Current sensors shall be Hawkeye Model H923 (manufactured by Veris Industries).

N. Duct temperature sensor probes shall have a minimum length of 8 inches and shall be selected with longer lengths when required to ensure accurate temperature readings and to avoid dead air spaces.

O. Averaging sensors and freeze sensors shall be a minimum length of 20 feet. Longer lengths and/or multiple sensors shall be provided as required to ensure adequate coverage of the entire surface of each coil. Sensor capillary shall be installed in a serpentine arrangement with coverage extending to within 6” of each coil perimeter edge (both top and side edges) and shall be installed such that there is no more than 12” between horizontal passes. Averaging sensors shall provide for averaging of the entire length of the capillary element rather than an average of individual sensing locations.

P. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) sensors shall be Vaisala Model GM (Model GMD20 for duct-mount applications and Model GMW21for wall-mount applications).

Q. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) sensors for outdoor applications shall be Vaisala Model GMP343 diffusion type. Furnish with standard diffusion filter kit and mounting bracket. The contractor shall furnish and install a sheet metal weather shield to protect the sensor from sun, rain, and snow.

R. Humidity sensors for duct-mount applications shall be Vaisala Model HMD-82. Humidity sensors for wall-mount applications shall be Vaisala Model HMW-83.


S. Air flow measuring stations shall be bead-in-glass thermistor type, Ebtron Gold Series Model GTx116. Sensor density and location shall be in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Duct-mounted air flow measuring stations shall be installed with a minimum of 24” of straight duct upstream of the sensor and with a minimum of 12” of straight duct downstream of the sensor. Duct sizing shall ensure a minimum velocity of 250 fpm.

T. Actuators for 3-way bypass valves at chillers shall be modulating type and shall have a maximum 60 second stroke time.

U. Audible/visible alarm horn/strobe for seismic gas valves shall be Amseco Model CSHB-BG with blue light lens, or approved equal by Kele & Associates. The alarm horn/strobe shall be located on the building exterior adjacent to the seismic gas valve (mounted at 7’-6” above finished grade).

1.10 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS

A. All control devices shall be installed in reasonably accessible locations. Control devices that may require occasional calibration or adjustment shall be given special consideration with regard to being installed in a reasonably accessible location.

B. Room sensors shall be programmable to allow for optional room temperature display (programming and/or setup of sensors shall allow for room temperature to be either displayed or not displayed - confirm display requirement prior to programming) and shall be provided with an override pushbutton and occupied mode indicating light.

C. Room sensors shall be labeled with the corresponding terminal unit or fan coil unit number. Labels shall be self-adhesive clear plastic with black lettering (1/8” height lettering).

D. Room sensors in laboratory areas shall be sealed at the wall penetration behind the sensor to prevent air migration into the sensor from adjacent areas (due to the negative pressure of labs as compared to adjoining spaces).

E. All valve and damper actuators shall be analog type. Incremental actuators will not be acceptable.

F. All vav box controllers shall be furnished and wired with an analog input allowing for feedback of the actual vav box damper position (indicated/displayed as 0% to 100% open). Calculated damper position will not be acceptable to meet this requirement.

G. An as-built control diagram shall be laminated and secured inside of each temperature control panel prior to commencement of the final on-site mechanical systems commissioning sessions.

H. All low voltage wiring (whether plenum rated or not) shall be installed in raceways with the following conditions, clarifications, and exceptions.

1. Fire alarm and security system wiring shall be installed in raceways with no exceptions.

2. Raceways shall be as defined in the National Electrical Code and open cable trays shall not be construed as meeting the definition of a raceway.

3. Low voltage wiring for telephone, data, communications, intercom, temperature controls, and energy management systems may be routed utilizing open cable trays above accessible ceilings.

4. Where open cable trays are utilized above accessible ceilings the following conditions apply.


a. Low voltage wiring routed in open cable trays shall be plenum-rated (whether or not the ceiling space is utilized as a return air plenum).

b. Low voltage wiring concealed in walls, floors, and above inaccessible ceilings shall be routed in raceways.

c. Low voltage wiring routed between conduit stubs and cable trays shall be secured with appropriately spaced j-supports.

1.11 CHILLER ROOM SIGNAGE

A. Chiller room signage shall comply with all requirements listed in Uniform Mechanical Code Chapter 11 and in ASHRAE Standard 15. All signage shall be submitted to the Owner for review and approval prior to ordering and installation. Provide plastic labels with a minimum lettering height of ½”. Signage shall be in accordance with the requirements listed in this specification (although additional signage may be required in the applicable codes and standards).

B. Provide signage at each chiller room door to read as follows (signage as required by ASHRAE Standard 15-2010 Section 11.7):

Machinery Room - Authorized Personnel Only No Entry Allowed During a Refrigerant Alarm Condition Except by Trained and Authorized Personnel Emergency Refrigerant Leak Procedures If the refrigerant leak alarm is determined to be a reportable event please contact the following representatives: Using Agency Name Using Agency Address Using Agency Phone (Normal Business Hours) Using Agency Phone (Nights and Weekends)


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements HYDRONIC PIPING March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 21 13 Page 1

SECTION 23 21 13

HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following:

1. Hot-water heating piping. 2. Chilled-water piping. 3. Condenser-water piping. 4. Makeup-water piping. 5. Condensate-drain piping. 6. Blowdown-drain piping. 7. Air-vent piping. 8. Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.


1. Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic piping.


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding pressure and temperature as required by project condition.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by the pressure-seal joint manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe couplings and fittings.

B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.



D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 01.


1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Water-Treatment Chemicals: Furnish enough chemicals for initial system startup and for preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve and automatic flow control valve, include flowmeter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.

C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. c. Victaulic Company.

2. Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze casting.

3. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting. Ductile-iron housing with keys matching pipe and fitting grooves, EPDM gasket rated for minimum 230 deg F for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.

D. Copper or Bronze Pressure-Seal Fittings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Stadler-Viega. b. Nibco. c. Apollo Express.

2. Housing: Copper. 3. O-Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM. 4. Tools: Manufacturer's special tools. 5. Minimum 200-psig working-pressure rating at 250 deg F.

E. Copper, Mechanically Formed Tee Option: For forming T-branch on copper water tube.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. T-DRILL Industries Inc. (Viega) b. Nibco. c. Apollo Express.

F. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.


B. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

C. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

D. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

E. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

F. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face.

G. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. c. Victaulic Company.

2. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

3. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

H. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed.


A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze


flanges.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.


E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures.


A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined and insulating, material suitable for system fluid, pressure and temperatures.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: As required for specific system pressures and

temperature. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. c. Pressure Rating: As required for specific pressures and temperatures. d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous;

threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Description: a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: As required for specific system pressures and

temperatures. c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company. b. Grinnell Mechanical Products. c. Perfection Corporation. d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. e. Victaulic Company.

2. Description: a. Standard: IAPMO PS 66 b. Electroplated steel nipple. complying with ASTM F 1545. c. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F. d. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. e. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

2.5 VALVES

A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."

C. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. c. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Taco. g. Nexus

2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Plug: Resin. 5. Seat: PTFE. 6. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure

meter. 8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 9. CWP Rating: Working pressure as required by project requirements. 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

D. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. c. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Taco. g. Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company. h. Nexus

2. Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi.

3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.


4. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 5. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 6. Seat: PTFE. 7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. 8. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure

meter. 9. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 10. CWP Rating: Minimum working pressure as required by project conditions. 11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

E. Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Body: Bronze or brass. 3. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 4. Seat: Brass. 5. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 6. Diaphragm: EPT. 7. Low inlet-pressure check valve. 8. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown. 9. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which

installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.

F. Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. d. Conbraco Industries, Inc. e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Body: Bronze or brass. 3. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 4. Seat: Brass. 5. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 6. Diaphragm: EPT. 7. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber. 8. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown. 9. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.

G. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Flow Design Inc. b. Griswold Controls.


c. Nexus 2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal. 3. Piston and Spring Assembly: Corrosion resistant, tamper proof, self cleaning,

and removable. 4. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve. 5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. 6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed. 7. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system

pressure fluctuations. 8. Minimum CWP Rating: Minimum working pressure as required by project

requirements. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

H. AIR CONTROL DEVICES

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

2. Wessels. 3. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 4. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. 5. Taco.

I. Manual Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. 6. CWP Rating: Minimum working pressure as required by project requirements. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.

J. Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4. 6. CWP Rating: Minimum working pressure as required by project requirements. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

K. Bladder-Type Expansion Tanks:

1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature. Factory test with taps fabricated and supports installed and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Bladder: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to maintain required expansion capacity.

3. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.

L. Tangential-Type Air Separators:

1. Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig minimum working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature.

2. Air Collector Tube: Perforated stainless steel, constructed to direct released air into expansion tank.


3. Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged connections for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

4. Blowdown Connection: Threaded. 5. Size: Match system flow capacity.

M. Air Purgers:

1. Body: Cast iron with internal baffles that slow the water velocity to separate the air from solution and divert it to the vent for quick removal.

2. Maximum Working Pressure: 150 psig. 3. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

2.6 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 5-gal. capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.

1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.

2.7 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area.

4. CWP Rating: Minimum working pressure as required for project conditions.

B. Basket Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area.

4. CWP Rating: Minimum working pressure as required for project conditions.

C. T-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end cap for strainer maintenance.

2. End Connections: Grooved ends. 3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket

with 57 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: Minimum working pressure as required for project conditions.

D. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: Minimum working pressure as required for project conditions.


5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

E. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Fiber-reinforced rubber body. 2. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel

flanges. 3. Performance: Capable of misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: Minimum working pressure as required for project conditions. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

F. Expansion fittings are specified in Division 23 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Type L drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and

flange fittings; and threaded joints.

B. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be any of the following:

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.

2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved, mechanical joints.

C. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Type L drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and

flange fittings; and threaded joints. 3. Schedule 5 steel pipe; steel, pressure-seal couplings and fittings; and pressure-

seal joints. 4. Schedule 40 CPVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent-welded joints.

D. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be any of the following:



E. Condenser-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints. 2. Schedule 80 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges

and flange fittings; and threaded joints.

F. Condenser-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be any of the following:




G. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

H. Makeup-Water Piping Installed Belowground and within Slabs: Type K (A), annealed-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. Use the fewest possible joints.

I. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type M (C) drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

J. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which blowdown drain is installed.

K. Air-Vent Piping:

1. Inlet: Same as service piping. 2. Outlet: Type K (A), annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.

L. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment.

B. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

C. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.

D. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS Dielectric Unions:

A. Dielectric Flanges:

B. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:

C. Dielectric Nipples:

D. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

E. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."


F. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:

G. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:

H. Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves:

I. Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves:

J. Automatic Flow-Control Valves: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

K. Manual Air Vents:

L. Automatic Air Vents:

M. Bladder-Type Expansion Tanks:

N. Tangential-Type Air Separators:

O. Air Purgers:

P. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 5-gal. capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.

Q. Y-Pattern Strainers:

R. Basket Strainers:

S. T-Pattern Strainers:

T. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:

U. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors:

V. Expansion fittings are specified in Division 23 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping."

W. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller shall be any of the following:

X. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be any of the following:

Y. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller shall be any of the following:

Z. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be any of the following:

AA. Condenser-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller shall be any of the following:

BB. Condenser-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be any of the following:

CC. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be the following:

DD. Makeup-Water Piping Installed Belowground and within Slabs: Type K (A), annealed-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. Use the fewest possible joints.


EE. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type M (C) drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

FF. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which blowdown drain is installed.

GG. Air-Vent Piping:

HH. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed.

II. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment.

JJ. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

KK. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.

LL. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.

3.4

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.


L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.

T. Install expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides.

U. Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section.

V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.

B. Seismic restraints are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

C. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.

2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer.

3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct

contact with copper pipe. 6. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum

rod sizes: 7. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet: minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.


8. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 9. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 10. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 11. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 12. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 13. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 14. NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 15. NPS 8: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

3.6 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION









G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.


I. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.


J. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure, and brazed joints.

K. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure. Leave insertion marks on pipe after assembly.

3.7 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only. Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.

C. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank.

D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 (DN 50) and larger.

E. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4 bypass line, from main with full-size, full-port, ball valve in the main between bypass connections. Install NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain and include a full-size, full-port, ball valve.

F. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure expansion tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.

3.8 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according to Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

3.9 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Perform an analysis of makeup water to determine type and quantities of chemical treatment needed to keep system free of scale, corrosion, and fouling, and to sustain the following water characteristics:

1. pH: 9.0 to 10.5. 2. "P" Alkalinity: 100 to 500 ppm. 3. Boron: 100 to 200 ppm. 4. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maximum 100 ppm. Modify this value if closed

system contains glycol. 5. Corrosion Inhibitor:

a. Sodium Nitrate: 1000 to 1500 ppm. b. Molybdate: 200 to 300 ppm. c. Chromate: 200 to 300 ppm. d. Sodium Nitrate Plus Molybdate: 100 to 200 ppm each. e. Chromate Plus Molybdate: 50 to 100 ppm each.

6. Soluble Copper: Maximum 0.20 ppm. 7. Tolyiriazole Copper and Yellow Metal Corrosion Inhibitor: Minimum 10 ppm.


8. Total Suspended Solids: Maximum 10 ppm. 9. Ammonia: Maximum 20 ppm. 10. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maximum 20 ppm. 11. Microbiological Limits:

a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maximum 1000 organisms/ml. b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maximum 100 organisms/ml. c. Nitrate Reducers: 100 organisms/ml. d. Sulfate Reducers: Maximum 0 organisms/ml. e. Iron Bacteria: Maximum 0 organisms/ml.

B. Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water.

C. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year of operation.


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens.

4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times

the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation.


3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and

operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements HYDRONIC PUMPS March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 21 23 Page 1

SECTION 23 21 23

HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Close coupled, end-suction centrifugal pumps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.

B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hydronic pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of hydronic pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section “Product Requirements”.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.


A. Manufacturer’s Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.

B. Store pumps in dry location.

C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.

D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.

E. Comply with pump manufacturer’s written rigging instructions.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.


1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal for each pump.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS


1. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett. 2. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 3. TACO Incorporated. 4. PACO

B. Description: Pumps shall be base mounted, single stage, end suction design with a foot mounted volute to allow removal and service of the entire rotating assembly without disturbing the pump piping, electrical motor connections or pump to motor alignment.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Pump volute shall be Class 30 cast iron with integrally-cast pedestal support feet.

2. Impeller: The impeller shall be a cast stainless steel enclosed type, balanced to ANSI/HI 9.6.4-2009 balance grade G6.3 and secured to the shaft by a locking capscrew or nut. For pumps not frequency-drive controlled, trim impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Carbon steel with bronze sleeve. 4. Seal: The liquid cavity shall be sealed off at the pump shaft by an internally-

flushed mechanical seal with ceramic seal seat and carbon seal ring, suitable for continuous operation at 225°F (107°C). A replaceable stainless steel shaft sleeve shall completely cover the wetted area under the seal.

5. Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing with grease fittings.

6. Vibration: The pump(s) vibration limits shall conform to Hydraulic Institute ANSI/HI 9.6.4- 2009 for recommend acceptable unfiltered field vibration limits (as measured per ANSI/HI 9.6.4-2009 Figure 9.6.4.2.3.1) for pumps with rolling contact bearings. Provide with vibration and temperature monitoring option.

7. A flexible type, center drop-out design coupling, capable of absorbing torsional vibration, shall be employed between the pump and motor. Pumps for variable speed application shall be provided with a suitable coupling sleeve. The coupling shall be shielded by a dual rated ANSI B15.1 & OSHA 1910.219 compliant coupling guard and contain viewing windows for inspection of the coupling.

D. Motor: Single speed, secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.

1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."


2.2 AUTOMATIC CONDENSATE PUMP UNITS


1. Hartell Pumps Div.; Milton Roy Co. 2. Little Giant Pump Co. 3. Liberty Pumps.

B. Description: Packaged units with corrosion-resistant pump, plastic tank with cover, and automatic controls. Include factory- or field-installed check valve and a 72-inch- minimum, electrical power cord with plug.

2.3 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Suction Diffuser:

1. Angle pattern. 2. 175-psig (1204-kPa) pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet

fitting. 3. Bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers. 4. Bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes. 5. Drain plug. 6. Factory-fabricated support.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation.

C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

B. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

C. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open drain.

D. Equipment Mounting: Install base-mounted pumps on cast in place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."


E. Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and with support springs and as indicated on the drawings.

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.

B. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.

C. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

D. Install check, shutoff, and throttling valves or triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps.

E. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.

F. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between pump casing and valves.

G. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.

H. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot

liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction. 5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for

operation. 6. Start motor. 7. Open discharge valve slowly.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train. Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 25 00 Page 1

SECTION 23 25 00

CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. All water treatment equipment, chemicals, test equipment, start-up service, and warranty period service shall be provided by one of the following water treatment specialists, or approved equal:

Chem-Aqua, Inc. Telephone No. (702) 452-1728 (Las Vegas)

B. The Contractor as referred to in this section of the specifications is generally intended to mean the mechanical contractor; however, work identified herein to be completed by the mechanical contractor may be assigned to and/or completed by the water treatment specialist.

C. The chemical water treatment system shall include controls and monitoring which are connected to building Management system. Alarms shall be sent when water quality levels are above/below acceptable range.

1.2 INITIAL SYSTEM CLEANING

A. The entire initial system cleaning process (including removal, cleaning, and replacement of strainers) shall be witnessed by the Owner’s designated representative. Any portion of the process that is not witnessed by the Owner’s designated representative will need to be repeated. The water treatment specialist shall be on site to supervise and monitor the initial system cleaning procedures for each system.

B. The Contractor shall coordinate with the temperature control contractor to arrange for all heating and/or cooling coil control valves to be fully open during the initial system cleaning process and also shall coordinate with the temperature control contractor to arrange for the various valves in the central plant to be positioned/alternated such that all portions of the piping system are thoroughly flushed and cleaned.

C. At the conclusion of the initial system cleaning process the Contractor shall remove, clean, and replace each strainer in the piping system(s).

D. During the HVAC Systems Commissioning the Contractor shall remove strainers as directed by the Owner to demonstrate that the system is completely clean (less than 10% blockage on all strainers). The Contractor shall also remove strainers as directed by the Owner during the last month of the warranty period to demonstrate that the system and strainers are still completely clean (less than 10% blockage on all strainers). Should the water system(s) and/or the strainers be found contaminated or dirty during either of the afore-mentioned observations, the Contractor shall clean the system(s) and strainers and re-treat the water system(s) as required until they are accepted as clean and properly treated.


1.3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS & INSTRUCTIONS

A. On-site start-up, service, and instruction shall be provided for each chemical treatment system by the water treatment specialist. Start-up of chemical treatment system and on-going chemical treatment of each system shall commence within 24 hours of the time that the system is started.

B. O&M manuals with initial dosage rates, on-going dosage recommendations, and O&M instructions shall be typed and submitted to the Owner.

C. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of seven days written advance notice of the proposed day and time for O&M instructions to the Owner and/or his representatives.

D. Furnish and install an appropriately sized wall-mounted shelf at or near the condenser water system controller to allow for storage of the operating and maintenance manual, test kit, and monthly treatment reports. Provide fixed bookends on the shelf to prevent the manual(s) and test kit from sliding off of the shelf ends.

1.4 CHEMICAL TREATMENT SERVICE

A. During the first year warranty period (and during the period of time that the equipment is operational prior to commencement of the warranty period) the water treatment specialist shall provide complete chemical treatment service. The service shall include all required chemicals and a minimum of monthly on-site visits to test and adjust water treatment (twice monthly during start-up period prior to commissioning). The warranty period commences on the date that the Notice of Substantial Completion is executed.

B. The water treatment specialist shall provide written reports of the activities performed and test results/water analyses for each visit. One copy of each report shall be left in an appropriate plastic folder at the chemical treatment equipment area on site.

C. During the last month of the one year warranty period the Contractor shall perform a thorough cleaning of the cooling tower (sump, interior surfaces, media, etc.).

D. At the end of the warranty period the treated equipment and piping systems shall be in as-new condition or the Contractor shall provide the required cleaning, service, repair, and/or replacement of any components that are not in as-new condition. The Contractor shall meet with the Owner’s representative(s) during the last month of the warranty period so that the Owner’s representative(s) can verify the condition of the equipment, piping systems, and strainers along with the Contractor.

E. In addition to the specified warranty period service the chemical treatment specialist shall also provide a second year of chemical treatment service. The service shall include all required chemicals and a minimum of monthly on-site visits to test and adjust water treatment.

1.5 HEATING WATER SYSTEM CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Furnish and install a 5 gallon pot feeder, rated and stamped for a maximum working pressure of 200 psi at 212 oF. Install feeder in a valved bypass arrangement around the circulating pump(s). Provide a valved drain connection which shall be piped to the nearest floor drain. All piping shall be 3/4" diameter Type 'L' copper.

B. Each pot feeder shall incorporate a removable strainer. Provide a minimum of three strainers to be used in succession until all contaminants have been removed (50 micron, 25 micron, and 10 micron strainers).


C. Add a non-chromate corrosion inhibitor (Sanacor 2301, or approved equal) to the recommended level of concentration (600 to 900 ppm sodium nitrite). Furnish the Owner with an inhibitor test kit, Taylor nitrite test set No. 1510, or approved equal.

1.6 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Furnish and install a 5 gallon pot feeder, rated and stamped for a maximum working pressure of 200 psi at 212 oF. Install feeder in a valved bypass arrangement around the circulating pump(s). Provide a valved drain connection which shall be piped to the nearest floor drain. All piping shall be 3/4" diameter Type 'L' copper.

B. Each pot feeder shall incorporate a removable strainer. Provide a minimum of three strainers to be used in succession until all contaminants have been removed (50 micron, 25 micron, and 10 micron strainers).

C. Add a non-chromate corrosion inhibitor (Sanacor 2301, or approved equal) to the recommended level of concentration (600 to 900 ppm sodium nitrite). Furnish the Owner with an inhibitor test kit, Taylor nitrite test set No. 1510, or approved equal.

1.7 CONDENSER WATER SYSTEM CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Equipment (the following equipment/features shall be provided):

1. Automatic conductivity controller with dual biocide feed capability shall provide control of dissolved solids in the condenser water by actuating a solenoid bleed valve and shall also activate the chemical pump(s) during the blow-down mode. The controller shall include the following: a. Controller shall be housed in a non-metallic enclosure with pre-wired

receptacles for the bleed valve and chemical pumps. b. Controller shall have a backlit display with continuous readout of

conductivity. c. Adjustable chemical feed limit timer to prevent chemical overfeed with

alarm contacts to indicate high and/or low chemical levels. d. Furnish with pre-plumbed flow switch. e. Controller shall be accurate to plus or minus 1%. f. Conductivity sensor shall be quick-release carbon graphite or stainless

steel electrode with automatic temperature compensation from 0oF to 140oF.

g. Controller shall have capability for water meter input/control via dry contacts.

h. Controller shall be equipped with dry contacts for remote monitoring of alarm status (high and/or low conductivity and low flow shall be available for remote alarm annunciation).

i. Conductivity and biocide timer control shall be Pulsatrol Model MC-9210, or approved equal.

2. Chemical Metering Pumps and Chemical Tanks. a. Pump shall be diaphragm type, electronically controlled, utilizing a linear

actuating solenoid coupled to the diaphragm, suitable for either tank-mounting or wall-mounting.

b. Liquid end shall be constructed of polypropylene or acrylic. c. Suction and discharge sections of the head shall each incorporate two

(2) ball-check valves. d. Pump housing shall be corrosion resistant; dust and waterproof. e. Metering accuracy shall be plus or minus 2%. f. Pump shall have a built-in priming valve. g. Pumps shall be Pulsatron Series A-Plus (Model LB03-SA-VTC1), Liquid

Metronics Incorporated (LMI) Model A-151, or approved equal.


h. Scale/corrosion inhibitor tank shall be minimum 30 gallon capacity and shall have secondary containment. Biocide tanks shall be minimum 15 gallon capacity and shall have secondary containment.

i. The chemical treatment piping connections to the condenser water piping system shall be installed utilizing a stainless steel injection quill/fitting. The chemical treatment specialist shall furnish the required stainless steel injection fittings for installation by the mechanical contractor.

3. Automatic Bleed Valve. a. The bleed valve shall be a slow closing, normally closed, spring return,

motorized ball valve (brass body with stainless steel ball and stem - or all PVDF construction) rated for 200 psi at 180oF.

4. Microprocessor-Based Time Clock for Biocide Feed. a. The microprocessor-based time clock shall initiate the second chemical

pump for the feed of a micro-biocide on a weekly basis (feed time shall be adjustable). The display shall be digital LED.

b. The timer shall be electrically interlocked to the conductivity controller and lock-out time shall be adjustable. Timer shall have the capability of alternating the feed of two biocides.

c. The enclosure shall be pre-wired to the conductivity controller. 5. Bypass Feeder (Condenser Water).

a. A five gallon bypass feeder shall be provided to facilitate a safe means of introducing the oil dispersant for initial system cleaning as well as feeding of an alternative micro-biocide.

b. The feeder body shall be fabricated of a heavy gauge welded steel with a 3-1/2" opening. The quick release cap made of cast iron shall be fitted with an ‘O’ ring gasket. The bypass feeder shall have a maximum working pressure of 300 psi at 212oF.

6. Water Meters. a. Condenser make-up water meter shall be SeaMetrics Model MJR, or

approved equal. Furnish with SeaMetrics signal splitter and power supply.

b. Condenser bleed water meter shall be SeaMetrics Model IP81, or approved equal. Furnish with SeaMetrics piping tee, signal splitter, and power supply.

c. Flow values from each water meter shall be split/configured to be monitored by both the condenser water system conductivity controller and by the direct digital control system.

B. Chemicals (the following chemicals shall be provided):

1. A sufficient supply of a liquid oil dispersant/surfactant for initial cleaning of each piping system.

2. A one year supply of a combination liquid dispersant, scale inhibitor and corrosion inhibitor (for the condenser water system).

3. A one year supply of two (2) complimenting broad spectrum micro-biocides effective over a pH range of 7.0 to 8.9 (for the condenser water system).

4. A one year supply of non-chromate corrosion inhibitor (for both the heating water and chilled water systems).

5. Note that the supply of chemicals (and the two year service period) are in addition to the chemicals and service required during start-up and check-out of the systems prior to commencement of the warranty period.

C. Hose and Hose Reel

1. Provide a 100 foot hose with wall mounted hose reel and spray nozzle to allow for periodic cleaning of the cooling tower media and basin.

D. Test Equipment (the following test kits shall be provided):


1. Inhibitor Test Kit 2. Alkalinity Test Kit 3. Calcium Hardness Test Kit 4. pH Test Kit 5. Triple Range Conductivity Meter 6. Nitrite Test Kit


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements COOLING TOWERS March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 23 65 00 Page 1

SECTION 23 65 00

COOLING TOWERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Open-circuit, induced-draft, cross-flow cooling towers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BMS: Building management system.

B. FRP: Fiber-reinforced polyester.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by CTI.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 for energy efficiency.

D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label heat-exchanger coils to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

E. CTI Certification: Cooling tower thermal performance according to CTI STD 201, "Certification Standard for Commercial Water-Cooling Towers Thermal Performance."

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate sizes, locations, and anchoring attachments of structural-steel support structures.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace the following components of cooling towers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period:

1. Fan assembly including fan, drive, and motor.


2. All components of cooling tower. 3. Warranty Period: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPEN-CIRCUIT, INDUCED-DRAFT, COUNTERFLOW COOLING TOWERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Baltimore Aircoil Company. 2. Evapco 3. Marley

B. Fabricate cooling tower mounting base with reinforcement strong enough to resist cooling tower movement during a seismic event when cooling tower is anchored to field support structure.

C. Cooling tower designed to resist wind load of: Reference Structural.

D. Casing and Frame:

1. Casing Material: 304 Stainless steel. 2. Frame Material: 304 Stainless steel. 3. Fasteners: 304 Stainless steel. 4. Joints and Seams: Sealed watertight. 5. Welded Connections: Continuous and watertight.

E. Collection Basin: Configure tower for installation with a field-constructed collection basin.

F. Collection Basin:

1. Material: 304 Stainless steel. 2. Removable stainless-steel suction strainer. 3. Overflow and drain connections. 4. Makeup water connection. 5. Outlet Connection: Grooved and BFW. 6. Basin Sweeper Distribution Piping and Nozzles:

a. Pipe Material: PVC. b. Nozzle Material: Plastic. c. Configure piping and nozzles to minimize sediment from collecting in the

collection basin.

G. Collection Basin Water-Level Control with 5 probe level controller and control valve.

H. Pressurized Water Distribution Piping: Main header and lateral branch piping designed for even distribution over heat-exchanger coil or fill throughout the flow range without the need for balancing valves and for connecting individual, removable, non-clogging spray nozzles.

1. Pipe Material: PVC 2. Spray Nozzle Material: PVC 3. Piping Supports: Corrosion-resistant hangers and supports to resist movement

during operation and shipment.

I. Fill:


1. Materials: PVC, resistant to rot, decay, and biological attack; with maximum flame-spread index of 5 according to ASTM E 84.

2. Fabrication: Fill-type sheets, fabricated, formed, and bonded together after forming into removable assemblies that are factory installed by manufacturer.

3. Fill Material Operating Temperature: Suitable for entering-water temperatures up through 130 deg F

J. Drift Eliminator:

1. Material: FRP; with maximum flame-spread index of 5 according to ASTM E 84. 2. UV Treatment: Inhibitors to protect against damage caused by UV radiation. 3. Configuration: Multipass, designed and tested to reduce water carryover to

achieve performance indicated. 4. Location: Separate and removable from fill. 5. Drift loss shall be less than 0.001%.

K. Air-Intake Louvers:

1. Material: PVC 2. UV Treatment: Inhibitors to protect against damage caused by UV radiation. 3. Louver Blades: Arranged to uniformly direct air into cooling tower, to minimize air

resistance, and to prevent water from splashing out of tower during all modes of operation including operation with fans off.

L. Removable Air-Intake Screens: PVC

M. Axial Fan: Balanced at the factory after assembly.

1. Blade Material: Aluminum 2. Sheave Material: Aluminum Alloy 3. Blade Pitch: Field adjustable. 4. Protective Enclosure: Removable, stainless-steel, wire-mesh screens, complying

with OSHA regulations. 5. Fan Shaft Bearings: self aligning pillow block bearings with lubrication lines

extended to side access door. Bearings designed for an L-10 life of 75,000 hours.

6. Bearings Grease Fittings: Extended lubrication lines to an easily accessible location.

7. Vibration switch

N. Belt Drive:

1. Service Factor: 1.5 based on motor nameplate horsepower. 2. Sheaves: Fan and motor shafts shall have taper-lock sheaves fabricated from

corrosion-resistant materials. 3. Belt: Multiple V-belt design with a matched set of belts. 4. Belt: One-piece, multigrooved, solid-back belt. 5. Belt Material: Oil resistant, nonstatic conducting, and constructed of neoprene

polyester cord. 6. Belt-Drive Guard: Comply with OSHA regulations.

O. Fan Motor:

1. General Requirements for Fan Motors: Comply with NEMA designation and temperature-rating requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment" and not indicated below.

2. Motor Enclosure: Totally enclosed air over (TEAO). 3. Energy Efficiency: NEMA Premium Efficient. 4. Service Factor: 1.15.


5. Insulation: Class F. 6. Variable-Speed Motors: Inverter-duty rated per NEMA MG-1, Section IV,

"Performance Standard Applying to All Machines," Part 31, "Definite-Purpose, Inverter-Fed, Polyphase Motors."

7. Motor Base: Adjustable, or other suitable provision for adjusting belt tension.

P. Fan Discharge Stack: Material shall match casing, manufacturer's standard design.

1. Stack Termination: Wire-mesh screens; complying with OSHA regulations.

Q. Vibration Switch: For each fan drive.

1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4. 2. Vibration Detection: Sensor with a field-adjustable, acceleration-sensitivity set

point in a range of 0 to 1 g and frequency range of 0 to 3000 cycles per minute. Cooling tower manufacturer shall recommend switch set point for proper operation and protection.

3. Provide switch with manual-reset button for field connection to a BMS and hardwired connection to fan motor electrical circuit.

4. Switch shall, on sensing excessive vibration, signal an alarm through the BMS and shut down the fan.

R. Controls: Comply with requirements in Division 25.

S. Personnel Access Components:

1. Internal Working / Service Platforms: Provide a complete internal working platform and ladder system for service of all drive components. A suitable working platform may be constructed of the fill media for counterflow cooling towers. If a crossflow tower is used, provide an internal stainless steel walkway with ladder and elevated working platform to allow for service and maintenance to motor and drive assembly.

2. Handrails/Grabrails: If access to fan deck is required, supply a perimeter handrail with ladder from grade to fan deck.

3. Ladders: Aluminum, sloped “ships type” with grabrail or vertical complying with 29 CFR 1910.27. Provide 3 ft ladder extension to the grade.

T. Capacities and Characteristics: Refer to the Drawings

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Test and certify cooling tower performance according to CTI STD 201, "Certification Standard for Commercial Water-Cooling Towers Thermal Performance."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before cooling tower installation, examine roughing-in for tower support, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting tower performance, maintenance, and operation.

1. Cooling tower locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install cooling towers on support structure indicated.

B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

C. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are not factory mounted.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to cooling towers to allow service and maintenance.

C. Install flexible pipe connectors at pipe connections of cooling towers mounted on vibration isolators.

D. Provide drain piping with valve at cooling tower drain connections and at low points in piping.

E. Connect cooling tower overflows and drains, and piping drains to sanitary sewage system.

F. Domestic Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping." Connect to water-level control with shutoff valve and union, flange, or mechanical coupling at each connection.

G. Supply and Return Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." Connect to entering cooling tower connections with shutoff valve, balancing valve, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Connect to leaving cooling tower connection with shutoff valve. Make connections to cooling tower with a union, flange, or mechanical coupling.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform field inspections.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.

C. Obtain performance data from manufacturer.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following: a. Clean entire unit including basins. b. Verify that accessories are properly installed. c. Verify clearances for airflow and for cooling tower servicing. d. Check for vibration isolation and structural support.


e. Lubricate bearings. f. Verify fan rotation for correct direction and for vibration or binding and

correct problems. g. Adjust belts to proper alignment and tension. h. Operate variable-speed fans through entire operating range and check

for harmonic vibration imbalance. Set motor controller to skip speeds resulting in abnormal vibration.

i. Check vibration switch setting. Verify operation. j. Verify water level in tower basin. Fill to proper startup level. Check

makeup water-level control and valve. k. Verify operation of basin heater and control.

D. Start cooling tower and associated water pumps. Follow manufacturer's written starting procedures.

E. Prepare a written startup report that records the results of tests and inspections.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set and balance water flow to each tower inlet.

B. Adjust water-level control for proper operating level.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain cooling towers.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 26 01 00 Page 1

SECTION 26 01 00

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies the basic requirements for the electrical installations and includes requirements common to more than one section of Division 26. In addition, this section and Division 26 specifications apply to the raceway systems for the low voltage pathway infrastructure cable plant. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 1.

B. Standards of the organizations listed below but referred to in the various sections by basic designation only, form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the reference thereto:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) as adopted by the Nevada State Fire

Marshal Division. 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 4. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES). 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 7. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 8. National Electrical Contractors' Association (NECA). 9. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 10. Factory Mutual (FM). 11. Federal Specifications (FS). 12. National Electrical Code (NEC) 13. Local area amendments to the NEC (if applicable). 14. ANSI TIA/EIA Telecommunication Building Wiring Standards.

C. References shall mean to the latest edition of the standard as adopted by the Nevada State Fire Marshal Division.

D. Conform to local ordinances and codes.


A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. Contractor shall coordinate with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor regarding the exact and specific rough-in requirements for equipment actually supplied.

B. Conduits, junction boxes, wireway, etc. required for low voltage/telecommunications, cabling shall be coordinated with telecommunications cabling divisions prior to rough-in.


1.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. Installation shall comply with the latest adopted edition of the National Electrical Code and all applicable local and state amendments.

B. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building components.

C. Verify all dimensions by field measurement. Do not scale drawings.

D. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for electrical installations.

E. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

F. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building.

G. Coordinate the access panel requirements with General Contractor to accommodate the installation of electrical equipment and materials.

H. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install electrical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

I. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

J. Coordinate the installation of electrical materials and equipment above ceilings with suspension system, mechanical equipment and systems, and structural components.

K. Contractor shall review Mechanical, Structural, Food Service, Low Voltage System and Architectural drawings prior to bid.

L. Final connections to equipment shall be per manufacturer's approved wiring diagrams, details and instructions. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide materials and equipment compatible with equipment actually supplied.

M. It is the intent of these drawings and specifications to establish a standard of quality.

N. Work shall be performed in a workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the Architect.

O. Contractor shall verify and coordinate exact location of equipment to be furnished by others prior to rough-in.

P. Contractor shall be responsible for replacing equipment which is damaged due to incorrect field wiring provided under this section or factory wiring in equipment provided under this division.

Q. Contractors shall visit site prior to bid and verify that conditions are as indicated. Contractor shall include in his bid, costs required to make his work meet existing conditions.

R. Proposed substitutions of electrical equipment or request for "or equivalent" or “approved equivalent "listing shall be submitted to architect in accordance with the Division 1 General Requirements.


S. Systems shall be complete, operable and ready for continuous operations. Lights, switches, receptacles, motors, etc., shall be connected and operable.

T. Electrical equipment 600 volts, nominal or less shall be located to maintain clear and level work spaces outlined in Part II of NEC 110. Panelboards, switchboards, transformers, disconnects, switches, breakers, etc. shall be located to comply with NEC 110.26(A). Where the clearances outlined in Part II of NEC 110 cannot be obtained, the Contractor shall notify the engineer prior to performing any rough-in.

U. Electrical equipment over 600 volts nominal shall be located to maintain clear and level work spaces outlined in Part III of NEC 110. Where the clearances outlined in Part III of NEC 110 cannot be obtained, the Contractor shall notify the engineer prior to performing any rough-in.-

V. Provide shop drawing submittal with 1/4" scale layout drawings of rooms with electrical equipment and/or transformers. Layouts shall show locations of and shall be coordinated with mechanical equipment and equipment shall be drawn to scale. Although alternate equipment manufacturers are listed for use on this project, if the selected manufacturer cannot meet the physical constraints of this project their equipment in total is not acceptable. Drawings shall indicate, by dimension, that clearances required by code are provided.

W. Receptacles installed outside, on the building exterior or roof, in kitchens or within six feet horizontally from a sink or drinking fountain unless located below a counter or otherwise protected, shall be GFCI type.

X. Provide separate neutral conductor for each arc-fault or ground fault circuit and for circuits on load side of dimmers.

Y. Coordinate the location of lighting fixtures with the architectural ceiling plan. Unless otherwise verified in writing, reflected ceiling plan shall govern.

Z. Coordinate the location of all wall mounted equipment with the architectural interior and exterior elevations. Unless otherwise verified in writing, architectural drawings shall govern.

AA. See Division 22 and 23 drawings for location of mechanical equipment. Provide service to and connect equipment as required. Provide fuses or HACR- type circuit breakers for all air conditioning equipment sized in accordance with manufacturer’s nameplate.

BB. Contractor shall provide controls, interlocks, accessories, etc., as required by the temperature control contractor. Refer to Division 23 drawings and temperature control diagrams for additional conduit, wire, relays, transformers, connections, etc. required for a complete and operable system.

CC. Provide disconnecting means at each motor, controller, appliance, etc. in accordance with applicable NEC requirements.

1.5 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary) and the Division 1 General Requirements for submittal definitions, requirements, and procedures.

B. Data shall be submitted at one time in three ring binders and indexed as scheduled below. Partial submittals will not be accepted.

1. 260100-Basic Electrical Requirements 2. 260500-Common Work Results for Electrical 3. 260519-Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 4. 260526-Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 5. 260529-Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems


6. 260533-Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 7. 260548-Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems 8. 260553-Identification for Electrical Systems 9. 260923-Lighting Control Devices 10. 260924-Lighting Control Panels 11. 261200-Medium-Voltage Transformers 12. 262413-Switchboards 13. 262416-Panelboards 14. 262726-Wiring Devices 15. 262813-Fuses 16. 262816-Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 17. 263600-Transfer Switches 18. 265100-Interior Lighting 19. 265600-Exterior Lighting 20. 268000-Photovolatic Systems

C. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products and accessories in a single submittal.

D. Identify products requiring color selections.

E. Identify products for use on project.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, compliance labels and similar information needed for distinct identification; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage and handling.

B. Contractor shall protect stored equipment and materials from damage and theft.

C. Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and equipment to minimize construction congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.

1.7 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Refer to Division 1- General Requirements for requirements. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.

B. Mark drawings to indicate revisions to exterior and interior conduit size and location and actual equipment locations, dimensioned to column lines; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangement; support and hanger details; As-built conditions.

C. Mark specifications to indicate approved substitutions; Addendums and equipment and materials used.

1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Refer to Division 1- General Requirements for procedures and requirements for preparation and submittal of maintenance manuals.

B. In addition to the information required by Division 1 for Maintenance Data, include the following information in English.


1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of all replaceable parts.

2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions and summer and winter operating instructions.

3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting, disassembly, repair and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.

C. Contractor installed labels/equipment marking and instruction shall be in English.

1.9 WARRANTIES

A. Refer to the Division 1- General Requirements for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment specifications for warranty requirements.

B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 26, into a separated set of vinyl covered, three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference.

C. For each product or equipment provide complete warranty information for each item to include date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.

1.10 CLEANING

A. Refer to Division 1 - General Requirements for final cleaning requirements.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 26 05 00 Page 1

SECTION 26 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout. 5. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Sleeves 2. Sleeve Seals 3. Grout

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 4. Install raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways to be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08- Openings.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07- Thermal Moisture and Protection.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270

mm) and no side more than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches (1270 mm) and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).

2.02 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Composite, glass reinforced or heavy duty plastic. Include two for each sealing element.

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.03 GROUT

A. Hydraulic-Cement Grout (non-shrink): ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-packaged, hydraulic-cement fine aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.


C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.02 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of floor or wall.

F. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

G. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

H. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07- Thermal and Moisture Protection.

I. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07- Thermal and Moisture Protection.

J. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

K. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

L. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.


3.03 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.04 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07- Thermal and Moisture Protection.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents AND CABLES 26 05 19 Page 1

SECTION 26 05 19

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.


1. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for voice and data circuits.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.


C. Comply with NFPA 70.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 2. General Cable Corporation. 3. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 4. Southwire Company.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Types THHN-THWN, XHHW.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than 100 amps; copper for feeders larger than 100 amps. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

D. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.


F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

G. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

H. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

I. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

G. Provide separate neutral conductor between each dimmer and load.

H. 20A, 120V branch circuits in excess of 75 feet from breaker to last load shall be #10AWG. 20A, 277V branch circuits in excess of 200 feet from breaker to last load shall be #10AWG

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."



A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS and perform a Megger test of all cables #1/0 and larger. Certify compliance with test parameters.

Megger Test

Applied Voltage DC Acceptable Results

1000 50 Mega-Ohm After 1 minute

Test results between 2 and 50 Mega-Ohms may be submitted for review and evaluation



UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 26 05 26 Page 1

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications:

1. Underground distribution grounding.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Ground electrodes. 2. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 3. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.

C. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.

D. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.


C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm)

in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated

with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section, unless otherwise indicated; with insulators and with tapped standard NEMA bolt holes for 2-hole compression connectors.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. All connectors and terminals shall conform to the requirements of UL486A.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Concrete Encased Electrode: Copper conductor encased by at least 2-inches (50 mm) of concrete, located within and near the bottom of a concrete foundation of footing with direct contact to earth, minimum 20 feet (6.0 m) in length.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 3/0 AWG minimum unless indicated otherwise.

1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.


2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when indicated as part of duct-bank installation.

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus on insulated spacers 1 inch (25 mm), minimum, from wall 6 inches (150 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, down to specified height above floor, and connect to horizontal bus.

E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Provide 2-50’ #2 stranded bare copper ground wires laid in the bottom of the conduit trench in opposite directions with 2-5’ tails left in the box. Ground wires shall be installed through a 1” PVC conduit in the structure’s end walls.

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields as recommended by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Provide 2-50’ #2 stranded bare copper ground wires laid in the bottom of the conduit trench in opposite directions with 2-5’ tails left in the box. Ground wires shall be installed through a 1” PVC conduit in the structure’s end walls.

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs.


7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. 8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from

grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway.

9. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power-distribution units.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch grounding bus with tapped standard NEMA bolt holes for 2-hole connectors.

2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

H. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.


2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

D. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

E. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70, using a minimum of 20 feet (6 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG.

1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet (6 m) long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation.

2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

B. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include location of each electrode, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.


C. Report measured ground resistances that exceed 5 ohms.

D. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 26 05 29 Page 1

SECTION 26 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.


1. Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Supporting devices.


B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports.

C. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit/Powerstrut. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. ERICO, Inc. d. GS Metals, Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation/Kindorf and Superstrut. f. Unistrut. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, epoxy or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. -EDIT

5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A36/A36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:


1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Prior to use of powder-actuated fasteners, approval must be received from project structural engineer. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2) Hilti Inc. 3) ITW Ramset/Red Head. 4) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: type suitable for attached structural element; complying with MSS 5P-58.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05- ‘Metals’ for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps, single bolt conduit clamps or single bolt using spring friction action for retention in support channel.


D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

E. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion

anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided

with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts or beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount

cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

F. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.

G. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch off wall.

H. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.

I. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment and conduit.


J. Obtain permission from project structural engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05- "Metals" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

D. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in all directions than the supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03- " Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.



3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING


1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09- Finishes for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7- Thermal and Moisture Protection.

UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 26 05 33 Page 1

SECTION 26 05 33

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

G. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

H. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

I. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Custom enclosures and cabinets. 2. For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following:

a. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. b. Frame and cover design. c. Grounding details. d. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons. e. Joint details.

C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.


2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.

D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosures and cabinets and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the cabinet or enclosure will remain in place

without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

F. Source quality-control test reports.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. Allied Electrical Group; a Div. of Tyco International, Ltd. a. Allied Tube & Conduit b. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Alflex / Southwire Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Conduit Pipe Products Co. 5. Electri-Flex Co. 6. Kaf-Tech; a Div. of Tyco International, Ltd. 7. KorKap; Rob Roy Industries 8. O-Z/Gedney; an EGS Electrical Group Brand 9. Perma-Cote; Rob Roy Industries 10. Plasti-Bond; Rob Roy Industries 11. RACO, a Hubbell Company 12. Republic Conduit 13. Western Tube & Conduit Corp. 14. Wheatland Tube Company

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. IMC: ANSI C80.6.


D. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit and PVC-coated rigid steel conduit: NEMA RN 1, Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum.

E. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

F. FMC: Nema RV 3, Zinc-coated steel.

G. LFMC: Nema RV 3, Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

H. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 2. Fittings for EMT: Steel, set-screw or compression type. 3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch (1 mm),

with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. 4. Rigid steel conduit and IMC fitting shall be threaded to match raceway material.

I. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. Allied Electrical Group; a Div. of Tyco International, Ltd. 2. Alflex / Southwire Co. 3. ARNCO / A-D Technologies 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. Carlon Electrical Products; a Thomas & Betts Corp. Brand 6. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group 7. Electri-Flex Co. 8. PW Eagle Inc.; Electrical Products Division 9. RACO, a Hubbell Company 10. Southern Pipe, Inc. 11. IPEX

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

C. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, type as required by environment.


D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

E. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.

F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Adalet; a Scott Fetzer Co. 2. Appleton Electric; an EGS Electrical Group Brand. 3. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; a Div. of Cooper Industries Inc. 4. Easter-Owens 5. Erikson Electrical Equipment Company 6. Hoffman 7. Hubbell Incorporated

a. Bell b. Killark c. RACO

8. Milbank Manufacturing 9. O-Z/Gedney; an EGS Electrical Group Brand 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation

a. Bowers b. Carlon c. Steel City d. Red Dot

11. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. 12. Wiremold/Legrand; Walker Products

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular, stamped steel, ridged non-metallic.

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

G. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.


2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1. Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit, IMC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit, IMC, EMT. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. All underground

conduits below concrete shall be below the base aggregate. Conduit elbows shall be vinyl dipped RGS as they turn vertical from the underground to aboveground.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes

raceways in the following locations: a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling

units. c. Mechanical rooms. d. Parking areas and parking garages.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless

steel in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: ¾ inch trade size for homeruns, ½ inch trade size for other use.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. For slabs above grade, raceway size & routing must be approved by the structural engineer. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.

2. Change from RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC to PVC coated, rigid steel conduit for elbow and riser for transitions from below grade or slab to above grade/slab above the floor.

3. Conduits at slab on grade shall be installed below the concrete slabs & shall be below the bedding/base aggregate.

I. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

J. Do not install any horizontal raceways across the roof/on the roof. All horizontal raceways shall be installed in the ceiling space below the roof.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

M. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire.

N. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

O. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use 36” (915mm) of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.


1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

P. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

Q. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface, use cast metal boxes for slab on grade, sheet metal or cast metal for floors above grade. Used ganged boxes for multiple services at one location.

R. Boxes shall be 4” square minimum with suitable ring for the surface or device.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and

encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel

conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 48 Page 1

SECTION 26 05 48

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Isolation pads. 2. Spring isolators. 3. Restrained spring isolators. 4. Channel support systems. 5. Restraint cables. 6. Hanger rod stiffeners. 7. Anchorage bushings and washers. 8. Outlet box pads.


1. Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.


A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Obtain Site Class as Defined in the IBC from the project structural engineer: 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC from

project structural engineer. a. Component Importance Factor: From project structural engineer. b. Component Response Modification Factor: From project structural

engineer. c. Component Amplification Factor: From project structural engineer.

3. Obtain Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods from project structural engineer.

4. Obtain Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period from project structural engineer.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used. a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report

numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member of an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

3. Restrained-Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraints to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints. a. Coordinate design calculations with wind-load calculations required for

equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 26 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices.

3. Field-fabricated supports. 4. Seismic-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacing’s. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).

C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

F. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL), and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



1. Kinetics Noise Control. 2. Mason Industries 3. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 4. Kinetics Noise Control. 5. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 6. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Pads: Arrange in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.



deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-

mm-) thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).

6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.

D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit-stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.


4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.


6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. -EDIT

2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

A. Manufacturer’s: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corporation. 3. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 4. Hilti Inc. 5. Mason Industries. 6. TOLCO Incorporated. 7. Unistrut.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application requirements shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A603 galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.

F. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.

G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices.

H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

I. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

J. Adhesive Anchor: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E488.





exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to

indicate capacity range.

2.4 OUTLET BOX PADS


1. Lowry’s 2. Kinetics Noise Control 3. Nelson 4. 3M 5. STI

B. Moldable putty pads for use with flush device metallic outlet boxes in gypsum board wall assemblies framed with studs. Pads shall be applied to the exterior of the outlet box.

C. Fire rated moldable putty pads for use with flush device metallic outlet boxes in rated gypsum board wall assemblies framed with studs. Pads shall be UL listed for the wall type and required fire rating. Pads shall be applied to the exterior of the outlet box.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.



3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.


3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment. 2. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where

clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). 3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

D. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. -EDIT

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for

exterior applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.

3.5 ACCOMODATION OF VIBRATING EQUIPMENT

A. Install flexible connections where they terminate with connection to electrical equipment that is vibration isolated.

B. Install flexible connections where they terminate with connection to transformers that are vibration isolated.




B. Tests and Inspections:





5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances. 9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until



D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight.


C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.


3.8 OUTLET BOX PADS

A. Moldable putty pads shall be used for outlet boxes in all sound rated walls.

B. Fire rated moldable putty pads shall be used for outlet boxes in all sound rated walls that are also fire rated.

C. Moldable putty pads are to be installed to completely cover the exterior surfaces of the outlet box (except for the side of the outlet box against the stud) including nailing tabs and completely seal against the stud within the stud cavity. An additional ball of the putty material used to plug the end of each electrical metallic tube or conduit at its connection to the box. A 1/8 in. thickness of putty material is required on the exterior surfaces of flush device boxes.

D. Thickness and application of fire rated putty pads shall be per the UL listing.

E. Putty pads shall be applied to the outlet box size as specified by the manufacturer for the particular product.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements IDENTIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 26 05 53 Page 1

SECTION 26 05 53

IDENTIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceway. 2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable. 3. Underground-line warning tape. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Instruction signs. 6. Equipment identification labels. 7. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1, ANSI C2 and ANSI Z535.4.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Color for Printed Legend:

1. Power Circuits: Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.

2.2 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

C. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels: Cut from 0.014-inch- (0.35-mm-) thick aluminum sheet, with stamped, embossed, or scribed legend, and fitted with tabs and matching slots for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.

D. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking nylon tie fastener.

2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape.

1. Not less than 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mils (0.102 mm) thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line.

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Safety Signs: Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.


B. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).

C. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs for Exterior Use: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).

D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."

2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.

1. In dirty environment provide engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. In clean environment, provide engraved legend with white letters on black face

for normal power and white letters on red face for emergency power.

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on black face for normal power and white letters on red face for emergency power. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb (22.6 kg), minimum. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

B. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. Select primer and finish coats applicable to the materials to be painted.

C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Revise this Article to suit Project.


B. Raceways and Duct Banks More Than 600 V Concealed within Buildings: 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-) high black letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:

1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches (300 mm) of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.

2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall. 3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts,

exposed in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.

C. Accessible Raceways More Than 600 V: Identify with "DANGER-HIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters at least 2 inches (50 mm) high, with self-adhesive vinyl labels or paint. Repeat legend at 10-foot (3-m) maximum intervals.

D. Accessible Raceways, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits: Identify with white self-adhesive vinyl label or paint self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands.

E. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systems with color-coded, self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands or paint: Color Minimum

Service Band Band Width Security and/or Access Control System Purple 2” EMCS Navy Blue 2” Telephone Black 2” Emergency Power Red 2” Life Safety/Fire Alarm White 2” Fiber Optic Orange 2”

F. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use color-coding conductor tape. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above.

G. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number.

H. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape or write on tags to conductors and list source and circuit number.

I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.

J. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.


K. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply baked-enamel warning signs. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches and metal clad cables. b. Controls with external control power connections.

2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

L. Instruction Signs:

1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfers and load shedding.

M. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label, Stenciled legend 4 inches (100 mm) high.

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. d. Transformers. e. Electrical substations. f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. g. Motor-control centers. h. Disconnect switches. i. Enclosed circuit breakers. j. Motor starters. k. Push-button stations. l. Power transfer equipment. m. Contactors. n. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. o. Battery inverter units. p. Battery racks. q. Power-generating units. r. Voice and data cable terminal equipment.


s. Master clock and program equipment. t. Intercommunication and call system master and staff stations. u. Television/audio components, racks, and controls. v. Fire-alarm control panel and annunciators. w. Security and intrusion-detection control stations, control panels, terminal

cabinets, and racks. x. Monitoring and control equipment. y. Uninterruptible power supply equipment. z. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication

and for signal and control functions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

G. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.

1. Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG, field applied. 2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White e. Ground Green

3. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow. d. Neutral: Grey e. Ground Green

4. Conductor identification shall be 3” from bottom of connector and shall be color coded as follows: a. Phase A= Red b. Phase B= Black c. Phase C= Blue

5. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.


H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 12 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDIES March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 26 05 73 Page 1

SECTION 26 05 73

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current overcurrent protective device coordination and arc flash studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device coordination study.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study, fault-current-study and arc flash, computer software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399 and IEEE1584.

C. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.

D. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be provided for review with the submittals for system protective devices. Submittals shall be in digital and paper copy form.

1. Electrical System Protection Drive study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.

2. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports. 3. Electrical System Protection Drive Study Report. 4. Relay settings not part of the coordination study. 5. Arc flash study including equipment labeling requirements.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.

B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.

1. Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of engineer.

C. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.

D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures for coordination studies.


E. Comply with IEEE 1584 for Arc Flash Studies and NFPA 70E.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. CGI CYME. 2. EDSA Micro Corporation. 3. ESA Inc. 4. Operation Technology, Inc. 5. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with IEEE 399 and 1584.

B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.

D. Computer software shall be capable of:

1. Calculate incident energy and flash boundary values and select PPE. 2. Produce arc flash labels. 3. Calculate arcing fault current values.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled.

3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 26 Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Impedance of utility service entrance.


3. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats, showing the following: a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types. b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios. c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages,

connection type, impedance, and X/R ratios. d. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance. e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor

material, insulation, and length. f. Busway ampacity and impedance. g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.

4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following: a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and

frequent starting and stopping. b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device,

magnetic inrush current, and overload capability. c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time,

type of start, and thermal-damage curve. d. Generator thermal-damage curve. e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective

devices. f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by

utility company. g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be

coordinated. h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms

symmetrical, ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical.

3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY

A. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at circuit-breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at each of the following:

1. Switchgear and switchboard bus. 2. Medium-voltage paralleling switchgear. 3. Motor-control center. 4. Distribution panelboard. 5. Branch circuit panelboard.

B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.

D. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with IEEE 141, IEEE 241 and IEEE 242.


1. Transformers: a. ANSI C57.12.10. b. ANSI C57.12.22. c. ANSI C57.12.40. d. IEEE C57.12.00. e. IEEE C57.96.

2. Medium-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.010. 3. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1. 4. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.

E. Study Report:

1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents on electrical distribution system diagram.

2. Show interrupting (5-cycle) and time-delayed currents (6 cycles and above) on medium- voltage breakers as needed to set relays and assess the sensitivity of overcurrent relays.

F. Equipment Evaluation Report:

1. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

2. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents; verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3.4 COORDINATION STUDY

A. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399.

1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents. 2. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds)

short-circuit currents. 3. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.

B. Comply with IEEE 141, IEEE 241 and IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.

C. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. Device shall not operate in response to the following: a. Inrush current when first energized. b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current,

whichever is specified for that transformer. c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required

by unusual loading or emergency conditions. 2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault

currents.

D. Motors served by voltages more than 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620.


E. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.

F. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of coordination study:

1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices: a. Device tag. b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-

pickup values. c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and

instantaneous settings. d. Fuse-current rating and type. e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.

2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the following information: a. Device tag. b. Voltage and current ratio for curves. c. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer. d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses. e. Cable damage curves. f. Transformer inrush points. g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.

G. Non-coordination and Protective Relay Setting

1. In addition to coordination protective device settings as indicated on the drawings, provide the following protective relay settings in tabular form: a. Device 27: Under voltage. b. Device 32: Directional power. c. Device 59: Over voltage. d. Device 81: Over and under frequency e. Device 47: Phase-sequence f. Device 87: Differential protection g. Device 67: Directional overcurrent

H. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.

3.5 ARC FLASH ANALYSIS

A. Perform an arc flash analysis study in conjunction with the previous specified short circuit and protective device coordination study. This arc flash analysis study to be performed in accordance with IEEE Std 1584a.

B. The study shall be calculated by means of a digital computer, with the latest version of SKM Analysis Software. Pertinent data and the rational employed in developing the calculations shall be incorporated in the introductory remarks of the study.

C. Determine the following for each bus analyzed:


1. Flash Hazard Protection Boundary 2. Incident Energy Level 3. Required Personal Protective Equipment and Insulated Tools Category 4. Type of Fire Rated Clothing 5. Limited Approach Boundary 6. Restricted Approach Boundary 7. Prohibited Approach Boundary

D. Produce an arc flash warning label for each piece of electrical equipment with a specific equipment ID and the previous items 1-7 listed. Also include the system operating voltage and date of issue. Labels shall be printed in color on adhesive backed nylon labels.

E. Present the data determined by the Arc Flash Analysis Study in a tabular format summary sheet. Include the following for each bus analyzed:

1. Flash Bus Name 2. Protective Device Name 3. Bus Operating Voltage 4. Bus Bolted Fault Current 5. Protective Device Bolted Fault Current 6. Protective Device Arcing Fault Current 7. Trip/Delay Time (Sec) 8. Breaker Opening Time (Sec) 9. Ground 10. Equipment Type 11. Gap (mm) 12. Arc Flash Boundary (in) 13. Working Distance (in) 14. Incident Energy (cal/cm2) 15. Required Protective FR Clothing Category


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 26 22 00 Page 1

SECTION 26 22 00

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA:

1. Distribution transformers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. dBA: A-weighted sound pressure level as defined by IEEE C57.12.91.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Sound Data: Sound level test data shall be provided for equipment to be used in this project. Testing shall comply with IEEE C57.12.91. Reporting shall similar to the requirements of IEEE C57.12.90.

1. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

2. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer.



C. Testing shall comply with the current revision/ 2001 IEEE C57.12.91, "Standard Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers".

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. ACME Electric Corporation 2. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products 3. Federal Pacific; a div. of Electro-Mechanical Corp. 4. General Electric Company 5. Hammond Power Solutions, Inc. 6. Power Quality International 7. Powersmiths International 8. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 9. Sola / Hevi-Duty; and EGS Electrical Group Brand 10. Square D, Schneider Electric

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Aluminum.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with IEEE #C57.12.01, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Cores: One leg per phase.

D. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.

1. Core and coil shall be vaccum pressure impregnated with resin compound.

E. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

1. Finish Color: Gray.

F. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.


G. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

H. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1. Meet or exceed US DOE CSL-3 efficiency levels. 2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2. 3. Provide Energy Star logo.

I. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91 by an independent test agency.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Provide flexible conduit connections in accordance with Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for equipment that is vibration isolated.


3.4 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements PANELBOARDS March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 26 24 16 Page 1

SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. General Requirements for Panelboards. 2. Distribution panelboards. 3. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 4. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Accessories, components and features.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7-05 and 7-02.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.- EDIT 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

E. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that

comply with requirements.

F. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "General Requirements," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or a NRTL as defined by OSHA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA or NICET to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories through one source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NEMA PB 1-2006.


F. Comply with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.1.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C)

to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C). b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section “Concrete”.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP)

Types: Two spares for each panelboard.


3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover.

4. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

5. Finishes: a. Panels and Trim: galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after

cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. 6. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Tin-plated copper. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment

grounding conductors; bonded to box. 3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors;

insulated from box. 4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL

listed as suitable for nonlinear loads.

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Tin-plated copper. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material.

Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor

material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.

Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. 7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on

extra-capacity neutral bus.


F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. Rating shall meet or exceed the rating indicated on the drawings or Section 260573 Electrical System Device Study, whichever is greater.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1-2006, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker, Fused switch or Lugs per drawings.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by one of the following:


B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.


2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, product by one of the following:


B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

3. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

4. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

5. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration.

6. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and

conductor materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Shunt Trip: 120V coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage.

f. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

g. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit.

h. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position.

i. Handel Ties: handle ties to operate multiple breakers as a single unit disconnect.

C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.

1. Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses."

2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles.

3. Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open and normally closed contact(s) that operate with switch handle operation.


2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base.

2. For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards.

5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

F. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.


G. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

H. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

I. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

J. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

K. Comply with NECA 1-2006.

L. Provide handle ties or multiple circuit breakers for simultaneous operation of all multi-wire circuits.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."




C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.


E. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.



3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more

than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Instruments and Equipment: 1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure

temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

F. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements WIRING DEVICES March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 26 27 26 Page 1

SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Wall-box motion sensors. 4. Isolated-ground receptacles. 5. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 6. Wall-switch and occupancy sensors. 7. Cord and plug sets. 8. Pendant Cord-connector device 9. Floor service outlet

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.



C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). 5. Lutron

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5362 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5362A (duplex).

B. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; IG5362RN b. Hubbell; IG5362. c. Leviton; 5362-IG. d. Pass & Seymour; IG6300.

2. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; VGF20. b. Pass & Seymour; 2094.


2.4 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; CWL520R. b. Hubbell; HBL2310. c. Leviton; 2310. d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.

B. Isolated-Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Hubbell; IG2310. b. Leviton; 2310-IG. c. Cooper; IGL520R

2. Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

2.5 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES

A. Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector; NEMA WD 6 configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade.

1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external cable grip.

2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector.

2.6 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.

1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent.

2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.

2.7 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224

(four way). b. Hubbell; HB1221 (single pole), HB1222 (two pole), HB1223 (three way),

HB1224 (four way).


c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way).

d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4 (four way).

C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V. b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V. c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON."

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 2221L. b. Hubbell; HBL1221L. c. Leviton; 1221-2L. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 1995. b. Hubbell; HBL1557. c. Leviton; 1257. d. Pass & Seymour; 1251.

F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 1995L. b. Hubbell; HBL1557L. c. Leviton; 1257L. d. Pass & Seymour; 1251L.

2.8 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Wall-Switch Sensors:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 6111 for 120 V, 6117 for 277 V. b. Hubbell; WS1277. c. Leviton; ODS 10-ID. d. Pass & Seymour; WS3000. e. Watt Stopper (The); WS-200.

2. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.


2.9 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic except in

kitchens, bars and similar food service 0.035-inch- thick, stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and

listed and labeled for use in "wet locations."

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.10 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange. 3. Wiring devices connected to emergency system: Red

2.11 FLOOR SERVICE

A. Type: Modular, flush-type, suitable for wiring method used. Utilized cast boxes for slab on grade, sheet metal above grade. Outlets for combined service shall be wiremold RFB services or equal with compartments & accessories as required.

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

C. Service Plate: Rectangular solid brass with satin finish.

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Openings for modular cable jacks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.


C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign

matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large

enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to

hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left.

2. Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral blade at the top.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.


I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

J. Provide tamper resistant receptacles in dwelling units and hospital grade tamper resistant receptacles in pediatric and psychiatric patient care areas.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served on back of device plate.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99.

2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 3. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 3. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 4. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely

mounted. 5. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at

the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements FUSES March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 26 28 13 Page 1

SECTION 26 28 13

FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits, enclosed switches, panelboards, switchboards, enclosed controllers and motor-control centers.

2. Spare-fuse cabinets.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings. a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original

fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating. b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature

adjustment calculations are based. 2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance,

electrical characteristics, and ratings. 3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. 5. Coordination charts and tables and related data. 6. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information. 2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. 4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.


B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40°F (5°C) or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C), apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses, class and current ratings indicated, voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

2.3 PLUG FUSES

A. Characteristics: UL 248-11, nonrenewable plug fuses; 125-V ac.

2.4 PLUG-FUSE ADAPTERS

A. Characteristics: Adapters for using Type S, rejection-base plug fuses in Edison-base fuseholders or sockets; ampere ratings matching fuse ratings; irremovable once installed.


2.5 SPARE-FUSE CABINET

A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted 0.05-inch (1.27mm) thick steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and key-coded cam lock and pull.

1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity minimum.

2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel. 3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high letters on exterior of

door. 4. Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Main Devices: Class L, time delay, RK1, time delay or J, time delay. 2. Feeders: Class L, time delay, Class J, time delay, RK1, RK5. 3. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay. 4. Other Branch Circuits: Class J, time delay, RK5. 5. Control Circuits: Class CC, time delay.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

B. Install plug-fuse adapters in Edison-base fuseholders and sockets. Ensure that adapters are irremovable once installed.

C. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s).

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.

UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 26 28 16 Page 1

SECTION 26 28 16

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Shunt trip switches. 4. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 5. Molded-case switches. 6. Enclosures. 7. Bolted Pressure Contact Switches

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

D. IETA: International Electrical Testing Association

E. NRTL: National Recognized Test Laboratory

F. NICET: National Institute of Certification in Electrical Technology.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for all types. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


C. Field quality-control reports.

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that

comply with requirements.

D. Manufacturer's field service report.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA or NICET to supervise on-site testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 122 deg F (50 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and other construction including piping, conduit and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.


1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following:

1. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

6. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 7. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES



B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:


1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

5. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle. 6. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS



B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings:

1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

F. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

G. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door.

H. Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (5-mA trip).

I. Ground-Fault, Circuit-Protection (GFCP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

J. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

material.


3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for feeding heating, air conditioning and refrigeration loads.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

5. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 6. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without

intentional time delay.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Kitchen and Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. 4. Hazardous locations: NEMA 250, type 7 or 9 as required for specification

application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NECA 1, NEMA PB1.1 and NEMA PB2.1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.




B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections and to assist in testing.

C. Acceptance Testing Preparation (100 amps and larger):

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit. 3. Verify labeling of switch and relay type. 4. Verify rating of installed fuses.

D. Tests and Inspections:




than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study".


UNLV SEP Mechanical Improvements ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS TESTING March 22, 2018 100% Construction Documents 26 95 00 Page 1

SECTION 26 95 00

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall retain the services of an independent testing firm deemed by the Owner as qualified to perform InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA) testing. Testing services shall be as described in this specification and shall be paid for and coordinated by the Contractor.

B. NETA testing procedures and requirements for tested values shall be in accordance with the most current edition of the NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications.

C. Any deficiencies or failures discovered during NETA testing procedures shall be promptly corrected by the Contractor to ensure timely completion of the project and to minimize the time required for the independent testing firm to complete their work.

D. Independent testing firms shall be listed below, or approved equal:

1. Electrical Reliability Services Northern Nevada Office (775) 746-4466 2. Electrical Reliability Services Southern Nevada Office (702) 597-0020 3. Southwest ElectriTech Services Southern Nevada Office (702) 685-5510

PART 2 - TEST REPORTS

2.1 Intermediate Test Reports

A. Intermediate test reports shall be issued by the independent testing firm immediately following each site visit. Intermediate test reports shall identify the general results of all field testing and field observations, and shall specifically identify any deficiencies, problems, or failures noted during site visit.

B. Intermediate test reports shall be issued/distributed to the electrical subcontractor, the general contractor, the electrical engineers, and to the Owner. The intent of this direct communication and/or notification to multiple parties is to ensure the ‘independent’ function of the independent testing firm and to present such information from being delayed or filtered by processing it though the electrical subcontractor and/or general contractor.

2.2 Final Test Report

A. Six copied of the final test report shall be issued by the independent testing firm following successful completion of all required electrical systems testing. The final test report shall be typed, bound, and indexed, and shall include a cover page that identifies the project name, project location, and project number. The final test report shall include a separate section for each area of required testing (tests summarized below).

1. Grounding Systems 2. Ground Fault Protection Systems 3. Circuit Breakers (Over 100 Amps) 4. Transformers (Dry Type)


5. Low Voltage Feeders (up to 600 volts) Serving Loads of 100 Amps or Greater 6. Underground Ducts and Raceways 7. Vibration and Seismic Controls 8. Electrical Power Monitoring and Control 9. Lighting Control Devices 10. Switchboards 11. Panelboards 12. Wiring Devices 13. Enclosed Switched and Circuit Breakers 14. Static Uninterruptable Power Supply 15. Surge Protective Device 16. Emergency Lighting

PART 3 - TESTING REQUIREMENTS

3.1 GROUNDING SYSTEMS

A. The following grounding system testing shall be conducted on two separate occasions, once prior to initializing electrical power for construction activities, and once when all electrical systems have been finalized.

B. Perform fall-of-potential testing of the main grounding electrode or grounding systems in accordance with IEEE Standard No. 81. If suitable locations for test rods are not available, a low resistance dead earth or reference ground shall be utilized.

1. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last traces of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

2. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each grounding electrode. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include location of each electrode and include observations of weather and other phenomenon that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

C. Perform point-to-point testing to determine the resistance (bonding) between the main grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral, and/or derived neutral points.

D. Measure system neutral-to-ground insulation resistance with the neutral disconnect link temporarily removed (replace neutral disconnect link after testing). This testing shall be performed at the origination point of all separately derived systems.

E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed 5 ohms. If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

3.2 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION SYSTEMS

A. Perform pickup tests utilizing primary injection. Verify that the relay does not operate at 90% of the pickup setting. Verify pickup is less than 125% of setting or 1200 amps (whichever is less).

B. On summation type systems utilizing phase and neutral current sensors verify correct polarities by applying current to each phase-neutral current transformer pair.


C. Measure time delay of the relay at 150% of pickup or greater by injecting current into the sensor. Total trip time shall be electronically monitored.

D. Verify that the reduced control voltage tripping capability is 55% of rated voltage for systems with external control power (reference UL-1053).

3.3 CIRCUIT BREAKERS (OVER 100 AMPS)

A. Test requirements apply to adjustable molded case, insulated case, and metal frame circuit breakers.

B. Measure contact resistance by millivolt drop method at rated current or by digital low resistance ohmmeter method.

C. Test insulation resistance from pole-to-pole and from pole-to-ground with breaker closed and across open contacts of each phase.

D. Adjust trip settings in accordance with coordination study.

E. Measure instantaneous pickup current by primary current injection.

F. Measure long-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.

G. Measure short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection.

H. Verify trip unit reset operation.

3.4 TRANSFORMERS (DRY TYPE)

A. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91

B. Test insulation resistance winding-to-winding and winding-to-ground and calculate the polarization index.

C. Test turns ratio between windings for all tap positions. Verify that winding polarities match the transformer nameplate.

D. Measure resistance of each high voltage winding in each no-load tap-changer position. Also measure resistance of each low voltage winding in each load tap-changer position (when applicable).

3.5 LOW VOLTAGE FEEDERS (up to 600 volts) SERVING LOADS OF 100 AMPS OR GREATER

A. Conduct megohm (Megger) testing of shield continuity resistance utilizing a megohmmeter.

B. Test insulation resistance phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase for one minute.

C. Test voltages shall be as recommended by the feeder manufacturer (or by NETA Acceptance Testing Specification).


3.6 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS

A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:


1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures.

2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-of-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.

B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.

3.7 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS


B. Tests and Inspections:





5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances. 9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until




3.8 ELETRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.


1. Electrical Tests: Use caution when testing devices containing solid-state components.

2. Continuity tests of circuits. 3. Operational Tests: Set and operate controls at workstation and at monitored and

controlled devices to demonstrate their functions and capabilities. Use a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating functions as recommended by manufacturer. Submit sequences for approval. Note response


to each test command and operation. Note time intervals between initiation of alarm conditions and registration of alarms at central-processing workstation. a. Coordinate testing required by this Section with that required by Sections

specifying equipment being monitored and controlled. b. Test LANs according to requirements in Division 27 Section

"Communications Horizontal Cabling." c. System components with battery backup shall be operated on battery

power for a period of not less than 10 percent of calculated battery operating time.

d. Verify accuracy of graphic screens and icons. e. Metering Test: Load feeders, measure loads on feeder conductor with

an rms reading clamp-on ammeter, and simultaneously read indicated current on the same phase at central-processing workstation. Record and compare values measured at the two locations. Resolve discrepancies greater than 5 percent and record resolution method and results.

f. Record metered values, control settings, operations, cues, time intervals, and functional observations and submit test reports printed by workstation printer.

E. Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified requirements are met.

F. Test Labeling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspections, apply a label to tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible agency and representative.

G. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.

H. Remove and replace malfunctioning devices and circuits and retest as specified above.

3.9 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.

2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays. a. Confirm that the placement, sensitivity and time-out adjustments for

occupant sensors yield acceptable performance. b. Confirm that the time switches and programmable schedule controls are

programmed to turn the lights off. c. Confirm that the placement and sensitivity adjustments for photo sensors

controls reduce electric light based on the amount of useable daylight in the space.

B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.

3.10 SWITCHBOARDS


B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.


C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.






than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.




E. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.11 PANELBOARDS



C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.


E. Tests and Inspections:




than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.




F. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.12 WIRING DEVICES

A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 2. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 3. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely

mounted. 4. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at

the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

3.13 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections and to assist in testing.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation (100 amps and larger):

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit. 3. Verify labeling of switch and relay type. 4. Verify rating of installed fuses.





than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.



D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.14 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust equipment installation including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Electrical Tests and Inspections: Perform tests and inspections according to manufacturer's written instructions and as listed below to demonstrate condition and performance of each UPS component:

1. Inspect interiors of enclosures, including the following: a. Integrity of mechanical and electrical connections. b. Component type and labeling verification. c. Ratings of installed components.

2. Load the system using a variable-load bank to simulate kilovolt amperes, kilo-watts, and power factor of loads for unit's rating. Use instruments calibrated, within the previous six months according to NIST standards. a. Simulate malfunctions to verify protective device operation. b. Test duration of supply on emergency, low-battery voltage shutdown,

and transfers and restoration due to normal source failure. c. Test harmonic content of input and output current less than 25, 50, and

100 percent of rated loads. d. Test output voltage under specified transient-load conditions. e. Test efficiency at 50, 75, and 100 percent of rated loads. f. Test remote status and alarm panel functions. g. Test battery-monitoring system functions.

C. Retest: Correct deficiencies and retest until specified requirements are met.

D. Record of Tests and Inspections: Maintain and submit documentation of tests and inspections, including references to manufacturers' written instructions and other test and inspection criteria. Include results of tests, inspections, and retests.

3.15 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE


B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, "Surge Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certify compliance with test parameters.


3. After installing SPD devices but before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

4. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. SPD device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.16 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.
